203
Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK User’s Manual Please visit our web site for User’s Manual in the latest version. http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_manual/lineup.html Model No. NP-PX1004UL-WH/NP-PX1004UL-BK

Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

Projector

PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BKUser’s Manual

Please visit our web site for User’s Manual in the latest version.http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_manual/lineup.html

Model No.NP-PX1004UL-WH/NP-PX1004UL-BK

Page 2: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

Ver. 1 9/16

• Apple,Mac,MacOS,andMacBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.

• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista, InternetExplorer, .NETFrameworkandPowerPointareeithera registeredtrademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.

• AccuBlend,NaViSet,andVirtualRemotearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofNECDispolaySolutions,Ltd.inJapan,intheUnitedStateandothercountries.

• ThetermsHDMIandHDMIHight-DefinitionMultimediaInterface,andtheHDMILogoaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMILicensingLLCintheUnitedStatesandothercountries.

• DisplayPortandDisplayPortComplianceLogoaretrademarksownedbytheVideoElectronicsStandardsAssocia-tion.

• HDBaseT™isatrademarkofHDBaseTAlliance.

• DLPandBrilliantColoraretrademarksofTexasInstruments.

• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandothercountries and areas.

• Wi-Fi®,Wi-FiAlliance®,andWi-FiProtectedAccess(WPA,WPA2)®areregisteredtrademarksoftheWi-FiAlliance.

• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation

• CRESTRONandROOMVIEWareregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectronics,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandothercountries.

• EthernetiseitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofFujiXeroxCo.,Ltd.

• ExtronandXTPareregisteredtrademarksofRGBSystems,Inc.intheUnitedStates.

• Otherproductandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksof their respective holders.

• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.

• TOPPERSSoftwareLicenses

TheproductincludessoftwarelicensedunderTOPPERSLicense.

Formoreinformationoneachsoftware,see“readme.pdf”insidethe“aboutTOPPERS”folderonthesuppliedCD-ROM.

NOTES(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.

(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionablepoints,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.

(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprofitorothermattersdeemedtoresultfromusingtheProjector.

Page 3: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

i

Important InformationSafety CautionsPrecautionsPleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.

CAUTIONToturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasilyaccessible.

CAUTIONTOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.

Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufficienttocauseelectricalshock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.

Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthisunit has been provided.Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.

WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.

DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)ThisClassAdigitalapparatuscomplieswithCanadianICES-003.

Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.

Disposing of your used product

In the European UnionEU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronicprod-uctscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisincludesprojectorsandtheirelectricalaccessories.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,pleasefollowtheguidanceofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpusreducethewastesaswellasthenegativeimpacttothehumanhealthandtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMemberStates.Outside the European UnionIfyouwishtodisposeofusedelectricalandelectronicproductsoutsidetheEuropeanunion,pleasecontactyourlocalauthorityandaskforthecorrectmethodofdisposal.

For EU:Thecrossed-outwheeledbinimpliesthatusedbatteriesshouldnotbeputtothegeneralhouseholdwaste!Thereisaseparatecollectionsystemforusedbatteries,toallowpropertreatmentandrecyclinginaccordancewithlegislation.

According the EU directive 2006/66/EC, the battery can’t be disposed improperly. The battery shall be sepa-rated to collect by local service.

Page 4: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

ii

Important Information

WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCaliforniatocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASHHANDSAFTERHANDLING.

RF Interference

WARNINGThisisaClassAproduct.Inadomesticenvironmentthisproductmaycauseradiointerferenceinwhichcasetheusermayberequiredtotakeadequatemeasures.CAUTION• Inordertoreduceanyinterferencewithradioandtelevisionreceptionuseasignalcablewithferritecoreattached.Useofsignalcableswithoutaferritecoreattachedmaycauseinterferencewithradioandtelevisionreception.

• ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassAdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferencewhentheequipmentisoperatedinacommercialenvironment.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,andcanradi-ateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstallationmanual,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.Operationofthisequipmentinaresidentialareaislikelytocauseharmfulinterferenceinwhichcasetheuserwillberequiredtocorrecttheinterferenceathisownexpense.

ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(16Amps)fuseinstalledforusewiththisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.

Important SafeguardsThesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventfireandshock.Pleasereadthemcarefullyandheedallwarnings.

WARNING• Whentheprojectorisdamaged,coolingfluidsmaycomeoutofinternalpart. Shouldthishappen,immediatelyturnofftheACsupplytotheprojectorandcontactyourdealer. DONOTtouchanddrinkthecoolingfluid.Whenthecoolingfluidsareswallowedorcontactedwithyoureyes,pleaseconsultmedicalattentionimmediately.Ifyoutouchthecoolingfluidwithyourhand,rinseyourhandswellunderrunningwater.

Installation• Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:- onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.- nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.- indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.- inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.- onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.

• Donotinstallandstoretheprojectorinthebelowcircumstances.Failuretodosomaycauseofmalfunction.- Inpowerfulmagneticfields- Incorrosivegasenvironment- Outdoors

• Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:- Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.- Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk

of bodily injury.- Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.

- Please consult your dealer for more information.

Page 5: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

iii

Important Information

WARNING• Donotcoverthelenswiththelenscaporequivalentwhiletheprojectorison.Doingsocanleadtomeltingof

thecapduetotheheatemittedfromthelightoutput.

• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.

Thisprojectorcanbeinstalledanyanglewithinverticalandhorizontal360°range,however,lifeofopticalpartswillbeshorteninthefollowinginstallationstate:• Whentheprojectorisinstalledonwhichlensfacesdownward.• Whentheintakeventontheprojectorsidefacesdownwardintheportraitinstallation.(→page155)Forportraitinstallation,installtheprojectorwiththeintakeventatthebottom.Observeprecautionsforportraitinstallation.* Acustomizedstandisrequiredtobeattachedtotheprojector.(→page156)

Fire and Shock Precautions • Ensurethatthereissufficientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyourprojector.Allowenoughspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.(→pagexi)

• Donottrytotouchtheexhaustventontherearside(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheatedwhiletheprojector is turned on and immediately after the projector is turned off. Parts of the projector may become tempo-rarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormal projector operation.

Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieveanyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyourprojector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnel.

• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorfire.• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof110-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupplyfitsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.

• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.• Donotlookintothelightsourceusingopticalinstruments(suchasmagnifyingglassesandmirrors).Visualimpair-

ment could result.• Whenturningontheprojector,ensurethatnobodyisfacingtowardsthelensinthepathofthelightemittedfromthelaser.Thefollowinglabel,thatisindicatedatthelens-mounting-sectionontheprojectorcabinet,describesthisprojectoriscategorizedintheriskgroup2ofIEC62471-5:2015.Aswithanybrightlightsource,donotstareintothebeam,RG2IEC62471-5:2015.

• Keepanyitems(magnifyingglassetc.)outofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightpathbeingprojectedfromthe

Page 6: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

iv

Important Information

lensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancauseanunpredictableoutcomesuchasafireorinjurytotheeyes.

• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent. Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheexhaust

vent.• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorfire.- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.- Donotheatthepowercord.- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.

• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnelunderthefollowingconditions:- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.

• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinet.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.• WhenusingaLANcable: Forsafety,donotconnecttotheterminalforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.•Donotusethemalfunctionedprojector.Itmaycauseofnotonlyelectricshockorfirebutalsoseriousdamagetoyoureyesight.

• Donotletchildrentooperatetheprojectorbythemselves.Iftheprojectorisoperatedbychildren,adultsneedtoattendandkeeptheireyesonchildren.

• Ifdamageormalfunctionoftheprojectorisfound,immediatelystoptouseitandconsultyourdealerforrepair.• Neverdisassemble,repair,andremodelbyendusers.Iftheseareperformedbyendusers,itmaycauseofserious

problem on users’ safety.• Consultyourdealerfordisposingtheprojector.Neverdisassembletheprojectorbeforedisposingit.

CAUTION• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.

• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footorhang-ingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.

• Select[HIGH]inFanmodeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.(Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(1)]→[FANMODE]→[HIGH].)

• Donotunplugthepowercordfromthewalloutletorprojectorwhentheprojectorispoweredon.DoingsocancausedamagetotheACINterminaloftheprojectorand(or)theprongplugofthepowercord.

ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,usetheprojector’smainpowerswitch,apowerstripequippedwithaswitch,orabreaker.

• Whenmovingtheprojector,makesureyouhaveatleasttwopeople.Attemptingtomovetheprojectoralonecouldresultinbackpainorotherinjuries.

Caution on Handling the Optional LensWhenshippingtheprojectorwiththelens,removethelensbeforeshippingtheprojector.Alwaysattachthedustcaptothelenswheneveritisnotmountedontheprojector.Thelensandthelensshiftmechanismmayencounterdam-agecausedbyimproperhandlingduringtransportation.Donotholdthelenspartwhencarryingtheprojector.Doingsocouldcausethefocusringtorotate,resultinginaccidentaldroppingoftheprojector.Formounting,replacing,andcleaningthelens,makesuretopowerofftheprojectoranddisconnectthepowercord.Failuretodosocanresultineyeinjury,electricshock,orburninjuries.

Page 7: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

v

Important Information

Precautions when installing or replacing the lens unit sold separately (LENS CALIBRATION) Afterinstallingorreplacingthelensunit,presseithertheSHUTTER/CALIBRATIONbuttononthemainunitortheINFO/L-CALIB.buttonwhilepressingtheCTLbuttonontheremotecontroltocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION].(→ page18,120)Bycarryingout[LENSCALIBRATION],theadjustmentrangeofthezoom,focus,andshiftofthe[LENSMEMORY]is calibrated. Contactyourdealertoinstallandreplacethelensunit.

Remote Control Precautions• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Light Module1. Alightmodulecontainingmultiplelaserdiodesisequippedintheproductasthelightsource.2. Theselaserdiodesaresealedinthelightmodule.Nomaintenanceorserviceisrequiredfortheperformanceof

thelightmodule.3. Enduserisnotallowedtoreplacethelightmodule.4. Contactqualifieddistributorforlightmodulereplacementandfurtherinformation.

Laser Safety Caution• ThisproductisclassifiedasRG2ofIEC62471-5Edition1.02015-06. ThisproductisclassifiedasClass3RofIEC60825-1Secondedition2007-03andClass1ofIEC60825-1Thirdedition2014-05.

AlsocomplieswithFDAperformancestandards21CFR1040.10and1040.11forlaserproductsexceptfordevia-tionspursuanttoLaserNoticeNo.50,datedJune24,2007.

Obeythelawsandregulationsofyourcountryinrelationtotheinstallationandmanagementofthedevice.• Wavelength450–460nm.• Maximumpower:360W• Thelasermoduleisequippedinthisproduct.Useofcontrolsoradjustmentsofproceduresotherthanthosespeci-fiedhereinmayresultinhazardousradiationexposure.

CAUTION• Useofcontrolsoradjustmentsorperformanceofproceduresotherthanthosespecifiedhereinmayresultinhazardousradiationexposure.

CAUTION – CLASS 3R OF IEC 60825-1 SECOND EDITION LASER PRODUCTLASERLIGHT–AVOIDDIRECTEYEEXPOSURE

Page 8: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

vi

Important Information

Applicablelensunit:NP16FL/NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL/NP31ZL

HorizontalangleH

Lens ZoomTele Wide

NP16FL — 32.9NP17ZL 15.5 21.7NP18ZL 12.4 16.1NP19ZL 7.7 12.7NP20ZL 5.3 7.9NP21ZL 3.4 5.4NP31ZL 27.8 33.6

VerticalangleV

Lens ZoomTele Wide

NP16FL — 22.0NP17ZL 9.8 14.0NP18ZL 7.8 10.2NP19ZL 4.8 8.0NP20ZL 3.3 5.0NP21ZL 2.1 3.4NP31ZL 18.2 22.5

H

H

V

V

Applicablelensunit:NP39ML

HorizontalangleH

Lens ZoomTele Wide

NP39ML — 52.8

VerticalangleV

Lens ZoomTele Wide

V1 V2NP39ML — 9.68 21.52

H

H

V1

V2

Page 9: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

vii

Important Information

• ThecautionandtheexplanatorylabelsoftheLASERPRODUCTinCLASS3RconformingtoIEC60825-1Secondedition,andinClass1conformingtoIEC60825-1Thirdeditionarestuckonthebelowindicatedpositions.

Label 1 Label2

Label 2

Label 1

Page 10: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

viii

Important Information

• Manufacturer'sIDLabel

(ForPX1004UL-WH)

(ForPX1004UL-BK)

PositionoftheManufacturer'sIDLabel

Page 11: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

ix

Important Information

About Copyright of original projected pictures:Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenuesuchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw:[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.

Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish marketEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.

Page 12: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

x

Important Information

Health precautions to users viewing 3D images

Beforeviewing,besuretoreadhealthcareprecautionsthatmaybefoundintheuser’smanualincludedwithyour3Deyeglassesoryour3DcompatiblecontentsuchasBlu-rayDiscs,videogames,computer’svideofilesandthelike.Toavoidanyadversesymptoms,heedthefollowing:• Donotuse3Deyeglassesforviewinganymaterialotherthan3Dimages.• Allowadistanceof2m/7feetorgreaterbetweenthescreenandauser.Viewing3Dimagesfromtooclosea

distance can strain your eyes.• Avoidviewing3Dimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.Takeabreakof15minutesorlongeraftereveryhourofviewing.

• Ifyouoranymemberofyourfamilyhasahistoryoflight-sensitiveseizures,consultadoctorbeforeviewing3Dimages.

• Whileviewing3Dimages,ifyougetsicksuchasnausea,dizziness,queasiness,headache,eyestrain,blurryvision,convulsions,andnumbness,stopviewingthem.Ifsymptomsstillpersist,consultadoctor.

• View3Dimagesfromthefrontofthescreen.Viewingfromananglemaycausefatigueoreyestrain.

Power management functionInordertokeeppowerconsumptionlow,thefollowingpowermanagementfunctions(1)and(2)havebeensetwhenshippedfromthefactory.Pleasedisplaytheon-screenmenuandchangethesettings(1)and(2)accordingtotheaimofusingtheprojector.

1. STANDBY MODE (Factory preset: NORMAL)

• When[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],thefollowingterminalsandfunctionswillnotwork:

HDMIOUTterminal,Ethernet/HDBaseTPort,USBPort,LANfunctions,MailAlertfunction

(→page136)

2. AUTO POWER OFF (Factory preset: 1 hour)

• When[1:00]isselectedfor[AUTOPOWEROFF],youcanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoffin1hourifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

(→page137)

Page 13: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

xi

Important Information

Clearance for Installing the ProjectorAllowampleclearancebetweentheprojectoranditssurroundingsasshownbelow.Thehightemperatureexhaustcomingoutofthedevicemaybesuckedintothedeviceagain.AvoidinstallingtheprojectorinaplacewhereairmovementfromtheHVACisdirectedattheprojector.HeatedairfromtheHVACcanbetakeninbytheprojector’sintakevent.Ifthishappens,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillrisetoohighcausingtheover-temperatureprotectortoautomaticallyturnofftheprojectorspower.• Concerningtotheportraitprojection,pleaserefer“Portraitprojection”onpage155.

Example 1 – If there are walls on both sides of the projector.

30cm/11.8"orgreater 30cm/11.8"orgreater

Intakevent

NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the left and right of the projector assuming sufficient clearance has been kept for the front, back and top of the projector.

Example 2 – If there is a wall behind the projector.

50cm/19.7"orgreater

LensExhaustvent

NOTE:The drawing shows the proper clearance required for the back of the projector assuming sufficient clearance has been kept for the right, left and top of the projector.

Page 14: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

xii

Table of ContentsImportant Information ............................................................................................ i

1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................1❶What’sintheBox?..........................................................................................................1❷IntroductiontotheProjector ...........................................................................................3

General .....................................................................................................................3Lightsource·Brightness ..........................................................................................3Installation .................................................................................................................3Videos .......................................................................................................................3Network .....................................................................................................................4Energy-saving ...........................................................................................................4Aboutthisuser’smanual...........................................................................................5

❸ Part Names of the Projector ...........................................................................................6Front/Top ..................................................................................................................6Rear ..........................................................................................................................7Controls/IndicatorPanel............................................................................................8TerminalsFeatures ...................................................................................................9

❹PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ..............................................................................10BatteryInstallation ..................................................................................................11RemoteControlPrecautions ...................................................................................11OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl ......................................................12UsingtheRemoteControlinWiredOperation ........................................................12

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ...............................................13❶FlowofProjectinganImage .........................................................................................13❷ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord .............................................14

UsingtheSuppliedPowerCords ............................................................................15UsingthePowerCordStopper ...............................................................................16

❸TurningontheProjector ...............................................................................................17PerformingLensCalibration ..................................................................................18NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) .......................................19

❹SelectingaSource .......................................................................................................20Selectingthecomputerorvideosource..................................................................20

❺AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ........................................................................22Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) .............................23Focus ......................................................................................................................26Zoom .......................................................................................................................31AdjustingtheTiltFoot .............................................................................................32

❻OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ..................................................................33AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust...................................................................33

❼TurningofftheProjector ...............................................................................................34❽AfterUse.......................................................................................................................35

3. Convenient Features ......................................................................................36❶Turnoffthelightoftheprojector(LENSSHUTTER) ....................................................36❷TurningofftheImage(AV-MUTE) ................................................................................36❸TurningOfftheOn-ScreenMenu(On-ScreenMute) ...................................................36❹ShifttheOn-ScreenMenudisplayingposition..............................................................37

Page 15: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

xiii

Table of Contents

❺FreezingaPicture ........................................................................................................37❻MagnifyingaPicture .....................................................................................................38❼ChangingLIGHTMODE/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingLIGHTMODE

[LIGHTMODE]........................................................................................................39CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ..............................................41

❽CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] .................42❾PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ..................................45❿Projecting3Dvideos.....................................................................................................48

Proceduretowatch3Dvideosusingthisprojector .................................................48Whenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D .....................................................................51

⓫ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ..................................................52⓬StoringChangesforLensShift,Zoom,andFocus[LENSMEMORY] .........................60

Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]: .....................................61Tocallupyouradjustedvaluesfrom[REF.LENSMEMORY]: ..............................63

4. Multi-Screen Projection ...............................................................................66❶Thingsthatcanbedoneusingmulti-screenprojection ................................................66

Case1.Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideos[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] .........................................................................................................66Case2.Usingfourprojectors(resolution:WUXGA)toprojectvideoswitharesolutionof2560×1600pixels[TILING] ..............................................................67Thingstonotewheninstallingprojectors ................................................................69

❷DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime ..................................................................70Projectingtwoscreens ............................................................................................71Switchingthemaindisplaywiththesub-displayandviceversa .............................72Restrictions .............................................................................................................73

❸DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING] ...........................................................74Settingtheoverlapofprojectionscreens ................................................................75BLENDCURVE ......................................................................................................77BlackLevelAdjustment...........................................................................................78

5. Using On-Screen Menu .................................................................................80❶UsingtheMenus...........................................................................................................80❷MenuElements.............................................................................................................81❸ListofMenuItems ........................................................................................................82❹MenuDescriptions&Functions[INPUT] ......................................................................88

HDMI .......................................................................................................................88DisplayPort..............................................................................................................88BNC ........................................................................................................................88BNC(CV) .................................................................................................................88BNC(Y/C) ................................................................................................................88COMPUTER ...........................................................................................................88HDBaseT ................................................................................................................88SLOT.......................................................................................................................88ENTRYLIST ...........................................................................................................88TESTPATTERN .....................................................................................................88

❺MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] ...................................................................92[PICTURE] ..............................................................................................................92[IMAGEOPTIONS] .................................................................................................96

Page 16: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

xiv

Table of Contents

[VIDEO] .................................................................................................................100[3DSETTINGS] ....................................................................................................102UsingtheLensMemoryFunction[LENSMEMORY] ............................................103

❻MenuDescriptions&Functions[DISPLAY]................................................................105[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE] ...............................................................................105[GEOMETRICCORRECTION] .............................................................................107[EDGEBLENDING] ..............................................................................................111[MULTISCREEN] .................................................................................................112

❼MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] ...................................................................114[MENU(1)] .............................................................................................................114[MENU(2)] .............................................................................................................115[INSTALLATION(1)] ..............................................................................................116[INSTALLATION(2)] ..............................................................................................119[CONTROL] ..........................................................................................................121[NETWORKSETTINGS].......................................................................................129[SOURCEOPTIONS] ...........................................................................................134[POWEROPTIONS] .............................................................................................136ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ..................................................................138

❽MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .....................................................................139[USAGETIME] ......................................................................................................139[SOURCE(1)] ........................................................................................................139[SOURCE(2)] ........................................................................................................140[SOURCE(3)] ........................................................................................................140[SOURCE(4)] ........................................................................................................140[WIREDLAN] ........................................................................................................141[VERSION(1)] .......................................................................................................141[OTHERS] .............................................................................................................141[HDBaseT] ............................................................................................................142

6. Connecting to Other Equipment ...........................................................143❶Mountingalens(soldseparately)...............................................................................143

Mountingthelens..................................................................................................143Removingthelens ................................................................................................144

❷MakingConnections ...................................................................................................145AnalogRGBsignalconnection .............................................................................145DigitalRGBsignalconnection ..............................................................................146ConnectinganExternalMonitor............................................................................149ConnectingYourBlu-rayPlayerorOtherAVEquipment .....................................150ConnectingComponentInput ...............................................................................151ConnectingHDMIInput.........................................................................................152ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ..................................................................................153ConnectingtoanHDBaseTtransmissiondevice(soldcommercially) ..................154Portraitprojection(verticalorientation) .................................................................155Stackingprojectors ...............................................................................................157

7. Maintenance .....................................................................................................160❶CleaningtheLens.......................................................................................................160❷CleaningtheCabinet ..................................................................................................160

Page 17: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

xv

Table of Contents

8. Appendix ..............................................................................................................161❶Throwdistanceandscreensize .................................................................................161

Lens types and throw distance .............................................................................161Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions ................................................................163Lensshiftingrange................................................................................................164

❷MountingtheOptionalBoard(soldseparately) ..........................................................165❸CompatibleInputSignalList .......................................................................................167❹Specifications .............................................................................................................170

PowerCord ...........................................................................................................173❺CabinetDimensions ...................................................................................................174❻Pinassignmentsandsignalnamesofmainterminals ................................................175❼ChangingtheBackgroundLogo(VirtualRemoteTool) ..............................................177❽Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................178

IndicatorMessages ...............................................................................................178CommonProblems&Solutions ............................................................................180Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. ..............................182

❾PCControlCodesandCableConnection ..................................................................183❿TroubleshootingCheckList ........................................................................................184

Page 18: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

1

1. Introduction❶ What’s in the Box?Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.

Projector

Dustcapforlens* Theprojectorisshippedwithoutalens.Forthetypesoflensandthrowdistances,seepage172.

Remotecontrol(7N901041)

AAalkalinebatteries(x2)

Lenstheftpreventionscrew(79TM1071)Thisscrewmakesitdif-ficulttoremovethelensmountedontheprojec-tor.(→page144)

Powercord×3

(79TM1021) (79TQ1001forAC120V) (79TQ1011forAC200V)

ForEurope/Asia/SouthAmerica ForNorthAmerica

4Stackingholders(79TM1101)Whenstackingprojectors(doublestacking),thetiltfootoftheupperprojectorwillbeplacedontothesestackingholders.(→ page158)

For North America onlyLimitedwarrantyFor customers in Europe: YouwillfindourcurrentvalidGuar-anteePolicyonourWebSite:www.nec-display-solutions.com• ImportantInfomation

(7N8N7461)• QuickSetupGuide(7N8N7471)• SecuritySticker (Usethisstickerwhensecuritypasswordisseton.)

NECProjectorCD-ROMUser’smanual(PDF)(7N952521)

Page 19: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

2

1. Introduction

Attaching/Removing the Dust CapTo remove thedust cap from theprojector, push thetongueatthetopleftoutwardandpulltheknobatthecenter of the cap.

Toattachthedustcaptotheprojector,locatethecatchon the lower end of the dust cap and place it into the openingoftheprojectorwiththepointofatrianglemark(▽)facingdownward(①inthefigurebelow),andthenpushtheupperendofthedustcapagainsttheprojec-tortoplacethecatchesintotheslotwhileclutchingthehandle(②inthefigurebelow).

Page 20: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

3

1. Introduction

❷ Introduction to the ProjectorThissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.

General

• Single-chipDLPprojectorwithhighresolutionandhighbrightness

Realizedtoprojecttheimageintheresolution1920×1200pixels(WUXGA),theaspectratioin16:10,andthebrightnessin10000lumens.

• Superiordust-proofstructure

Adaptedthecyclecoolingsystemforcoolingdowntheopticalparts.Bythissystem,airinthelightsourceiscooleddownandcirculated.Astheresult,theopticalpartsarenotexposedtotheopenairandenabletokeepbrightnesswithout contamination by dust.

* Cannotpreventcontaminationbydustcompletely.

Light source · Brightness

• Along-lifelaserdiodeisequippedinthelightmodule

Theproductcanbeoperatedatlowcostbecausethelaserlightsourcecanbeusedforalongtimewithoutrequir-ingreplacementormaintenance.

• Brightnesscanbeadjustedwithinawiderange

Unlikewithordinarylightsources,thebrightnesscanbeadjustedfrom20to100%in1%increments.

• [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode

Brightnessnormallydecreaseswithuse,butbyselecting[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode,sensorsinsidetheprojectordetectandautomaticallyadjusttheoutput,therebymaintainingconstantbrightnessthroughoutthelifeofthelightmodule.

However,ifbrightnessoutputissetatthemaximum,brightnesswilldecreasewithuse.

Installation

• Widerangeofoptionallensesselectableaccordingtotheplaceofinstallation

Thisprojectorsupports8typesofoptionallenses,providingaselectionoflensesadaptedtoavarietyofplacesof installation and projection methods.

Inaddition,thelensescanbemountedandremovedinonetouch.

Note that no lens is mounted upon shipment from the factory. Please purchase optional lenses separately.

• Thisprojectorcanbeinstalledanyanglewithinverticalandhorizontal360°range,however,lifeofopticalparts will be shorten in the following installation state:

• Whentheprojectorisinstalledonwhichlensfacesdownward.

• Whentheintakeventontheprojectorsidefacesdownwardintheportraitinstallation.(Seepage155)

• Doublestackableforhighlightoutputprojection

Bystacking2projectors,increasedbrightnessonalargescreenispossible.

• Powerlenscontrolforquickandeasyadjustment

Byusingbuttonsontheprojectorortheremotecontrol,zoom,focus,andposition(lensshift)canbeadjusted.

Videos

• Widerangeofinput/outputterminals(HDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,HDBaseT,etc.)andbuilt-inmonauralspeaker

Theprojector isequippedwithavarietyof input/output terminals:HDMI,DisplayPort,BNC(5-core),computer(analog),HDBaseT,etc.

Theprojector’sHDMIinput/outputterminalsandDisplayPortinputterminalsupportHDCP.

HDBaseT,promotedandadvancedbytheHDBaseTAlliance,isaconsumerelectronic(CE)andcommercialcon-nectivitytechnology.

Page 21: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4

1. Introduction

• Slotforoptionalboard

Thisprojectorhasaslotforoptionalboards(soldseparately).

• Simultaneousdisplayof2images(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE)

Twoimagescanbeprojectedsimultaneouslywithasingleprojector.

Therearetwotypesoflayoutsforthetwoimages:“picture-in-picture”(PIP)inwhichasub-pictureisdisplayedonthemainpicture,and“picture-by-picture”(PICTUREBYPICTURE)inwhichthemainandsubpicturesaredisplayednexttoeachother.

• Multi-screenprojectionusingmultipleprojectors

ThisprojectorisequippedwithmultipleHDMIinput&outputterminalsthatcanconnectmultipleprojectorsinadaisychain.Bydividingandprojectinghighresolutionimageoneachprojector,highqualityimagecanberealized.

Furthermore,theboundariesofthescreensaresmoothedusinganedgeblendingfunction.

• SupportsHDMI3Dformat

Thisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-available3DemittersthatsupportXpand3Dandactiveshutter-type3Deyewear.

Network

• Convenientutilitysoftware(UserSupportware)

Thisprojectorsupportsourutilitysoftware(NaViSetAdministrator2,VirtualRemoteTool,etc.). NaViSetAdministrator2helpsyoucontroltheprojectorbyacomputerviawiredLANconnection.

VirtualRemoteToolhelpsyouperformoperationsbyavirtualremotecontrolsuchasprojector'spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviawiredLANconnection.Moreover,ithasfunctiontosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodata.

Pleasevisitourwebsitefordownloadingeachsoftware.

URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html

• CRESTRONROOMVIEWcompatible

ThisprojectorsupportsCRESTRONROOMVIEW,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedtothenetworktobeman-agedfromacomputerorcontroller.

Energy-saving

• Energy-savingdesignwithastandbypowerconsumptionof0.30wattsorunder

Whentheon-screenmenu’sstandbymodeissetto“NORMAL”,thepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodeis0.30wattsorunder.

0.20wattswithpowervoltageAC110V-130Vand0.30wattswithpowervoltageAC200V-240V.

• “LIGHTMODE”forlowpowerconsumptionand“CarbonMeter”display

Theprojectorisequippedwithan“LIGHTMODE”forreducingpowerconsumptionduringuse.Furthermore,thepower-savingeffectwhentheLIGHTMODEissetisconvertedintotheamountofreductionsofCO2 emissions andthisisindicatedontheconfirmationmessagedisplayedwhenthepoweristurnedoffandat“Information”ontheon-screenmenu(CARBONMETER).

Page 22: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

5

1. Introduction

About this user’s manualThefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthefirsttime.Takeafewminutesnowtoreviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llfindanoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.

Page 23: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

6

1. Introduction

❸ Part Names of the ProjectorFront/TopThelensissoldseparately.ThedescriptionbelowisforwhentheNP18ZLlensismounted.

Lens

RemoteSensor(locatedonthefrontandtherear)

(→page12)

IndicatorPanel(→page8)

IntakeventTakesinairtocooltheunit.

(→pagexi,155)

RemoteSensor(→page12)

StackingHolderfixingsection(4locations)

IntakeventTakesinairtocooltheunit.(→pagexi,155)

TiltFoot(→page32)

LensRelease(LENS)Button(→page144)

LensCap(Thelenscapisattached

tothelens.)

Page 24: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

7

1. Introduction

Rear

ACINterminalConnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplughere,andplugtheotherendintoanactivewalloutlet.(→page14)

Theftpreventionscrewholeforthelensunit

MainpowerswitchWhileACpowerisbeingsupplied,setthemainpowerswitchtoONposition(|),thenyourprojectorwillenterastandbystate.

PowerCordStopper(→page16)

* ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver®SecuritySystem.

Built-inSecuritySlot( )*

SecurityBarFixingatheftprevention

device.Thesecuritybaracceptssecuritywiresorchains

upto0.18inch/4.6mmindiameter.

Handle(locatedon4posi-tions)

Fortransportation

NOTE: • Formoving the projector,makesureyouhaveatleasttwo people. At the same time, do not grip and hold the projector other than by these handles. Attempting tomovetheprojectoralonecould result in back pain or other injuries.

IntakeventTakesinairtocooltheunit.(→pagexi,155)

Terminals(→page9)

ExhaustventHeatedaiirisexhausted

fromhere.(→pagexi,155)

Controls(→page8)

Page 25: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

8

1. Introduction

Controls/Indicator Panel

10 11

5 4 3 2 161513 8

7

141716 9 12

1. (POWER)Button (→page18,34)

2. POWER Indicator (→page17,18,34,178)

3. STATUS Indicator (→page178)

4. LIGHT Indicator (→page39,179)

5. TEMP.Indicator (→page179)

6. SOURCEButton (→page20)

7. AUTOADJ.Button (→page33)

8. 3DREFORMButton (→page42)

9. MENUButton (→page80)

10. ▲▼◀▶Buttons (→page80)

11. ENTERButton (→page80)

12.EXITButton (→page80)

13.SHUTTER/CALIBRATIONButton (→page36)

14.LIGHTButton (→page39)

15.LENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONButton (→page23,60,164)

16.FOCUS+/−Button (→page26)

17. ZOOM+/−Button (→page31)

Page 26: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

9

1. Introduction

Terminals Features

9

101112

1 7

4

56

238

1314

1. COMPUTERIN(MiniD-Sub15Pin) (→page14,145,151,175)

2. DisplayPortINTerminal(DisplayPort20Pin) (→page146,175)

3. HDMIINTerminal(TypeA) (→page146,148,152,175)

4. BNCIN[R/Cr/CV,G/Y/Y,B/Cb/C,H,V]Terminals(BNC×5)

(→page145,150)

5. BNC(Y/C)InputTerminal(BNC×2) (→page150)

6. BNC(CV)InputTerminal(BNC×1) (→page150)

7. USBPort(TypeA) (→page176) (Forfutureexpansion.Thisportallowsforpowersup-

ply.)

8. HDMIOUTTerminal(TypeA) (→page149)

9. Ethernet/HDBaseTPort(RJ-45) (→page153,154,176)

10.3DSYNCTerminal(MiniDIN3Pin) (→page48)

11. PCCONTROLPort(D-Sub9Pin) (→page176,183) Use this port to connect aPC or control system.

Thisenablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserialcommunicationprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourownprogram,typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage183.

12.REMOTETerminal(StereoMini) Usethisjackforwiredremotecontroloftheprojector

usingacommerciallyavailableremotecablewith⌀3.5stereomini-plug(withoutresistance).

Connecttheprojectorandthesuppliedremotecontrolusingacommerciallyavailablewiredremotecontrolcable.

(→page12)

NOTE: • Whenaremotecontrolcable isconnectedtotheREMOTE

terminal, infrared remote control operations cannot be per-formed.

• PowercannotbesuppliedfromtheREMOTEterminaltotheremote control.

• When [HDBaseT] is selected in the [REMOTE SENSOR]and theprojector isconnected toacommercially-availabletransmissiondevicethatsupportsHDBaseT,remotecontroloperations in infra-red cannot be carried out if transmission of remote control signals has been set up in the transmission device.However,remotecontrolusinginfraredrayscanbecarriedoutwhenthepowersupplyofthetransmissiondeviceis switched off.

13. SLOT (→page165)

14. Service terminal Forserviceonly

Page 27: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

10

1. Introduction

❹ Part Names of the Remote Control

1. Infrared Transmitter (→page12)

2. RemoteJack Connectacommerciallyavailable

remote cable here for wired opera-tion.(→page12)

3. POWERONButton (→page18)

4. POWEROFFButton (→page34)

5. INFO/L-CALIB.Button Displaythe[SOURCE(1)]screen

of the on-screen menu. (→page18,139)

6. VOL./FOCUS+/−Buttons (→page26)

7. D-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−Buttons (→page38)

8. TESTButton (→page88)

9. ECO/L-SHIFTButton (→page25,39)

10.MENUButton (→page80)

11. EXITButton (→page80)

12.ENTERButton (→page80)

13. ▲▼◀▶Button (→page80)

14.ON-SCREENButton (→page36)

15.SHUTTERButton (→page36)

16.AV-MUTEButton (→page36)

17. PICTUREButton (→page92,94)

18.SOURCEButton (→page20)

19.3DREFORMButton (→page42)

20.PIP/FREEZEButton (→page37,71)

1

3

4

6

14

10

12

16

20

7

2

5

8

9

11

15

1817

13

2119

252832

2322

35

24

30

26

29

34

27

3136

33

21.AUTOADJ.Button (→page33)

22,23.COMPUTER1/2Button (→page20)

24.COMPUTER3Button (This button is notwork on this

projector.)

25.VIDEOButton (→page20)

26.S-VIDEOButton (→page20)

27.HDMIButton (→page20)

28.DisplayPortButton (→page20)

29.VIEWERButton (TheVIEWERbuttonwillnotwork

onthisseriesofprojectors.)

30.NETWORKButton (→page20)

31.SLOTButton (→page20,165)

32.IDSETButton (→page127)

33.Numeric(0to9/CLEAR)But-tons

(→page127) (TheAUXbuttonwillnotworkon

thisseriesofprojectors.)

34.CTLButton Thisbuttonisusedinconjunction

with other buttons, similar to aCTRLkeyonacomputer.

35.LIGHTButton Thisbuttonisusedtoturnonthe

backlight for the remote controlbuttons.

The backlight will turn off if nobutton operation is made for 10 seconds.

36.HELPButton (→page139)

Page 28: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

11

1. Introduction

Battery Installation1. Press the catch and remove

the battery cover.2. Install new ones (AA). En-

sure that you have the bat-teries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly.

3. Slip the cover back over the batteries until it snaps into place.

NOTE:Donotmixdifferenttypesofbatteriesornewand old batteries.

1

2 1 2

Remote Control Precautions

• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.

• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.

• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.

• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.

• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.

• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.

• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.

• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.

• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Page 29: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

12

1. Introduction

Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control

7m/276inch

7m/276inch

Remotecontrol

Remotesensoronprojectorcabinet

7m/276inc

h

7m/276inch

30°

30°

30°

30°15°

30°

30°

30°15°

30°

• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabovemetersandwithina60-degreeangleoftheremote sensor on the projector cabinet.

• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfallsonthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.

Using the Remote Control in Wired OperationConnectoneendoftheremotecabletotheREMOTEterminalandtheotherendtotheremotejackontheremotecontrol.

REMOTE

RemoteJack

NOTE: • WhenaremotecableisinsertedintotheREMOTEterminal,theremotecontroldoesnotworkforinfraredwirelesscommunication.• PowerwillnotbesuppliedtotheremotecontrolbytheprojectorviatheREMOTEjack.Batteryisneededwhentheremotecontrol

is used in wired operation.

Page 30: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

13

Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.

❶ Flow of Projecting an Image

Step 1• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→ page 14)

Step 2 • Turningontheprojector(→ page 17)

Step 3 • Selectingasource(→ page 20)

Step 4• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→ page 22)

• Correctingkeystonedistortion[CORNERSTONE](→ page 42)

Step 5• Adjustingapicture

- Optimizingacomputersignalautomatically(→page33)

Step 6• Makingapresentation

Step 7• Turningofftheprojector(→ page 34)

Step 8• Afteruse(→ page 35)

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Page 31: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

14

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❷ Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord

1.Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.

Thissectionwillshowyouabasicconnectiontoacomputer.Forinformationaboutotherconnections,see“(2)MakingConnections”onpage145.

Connectthedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputertotheCOMPUTERINterminalontheprojectorwithacommercially-availablecomputercable(withferritecore)andthenturntheknobsoftheterminalstosecurethem.

2.Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.

WARNING

MAKESURETOTAKETHEGROUNDCONNECTIONFORTHEDEVICE.TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT'SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDOR INANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.

ImportantInformation:

• Whenplugginginorunpluggingthesuppliedpowercord,makesurethatthemainpowerswitchispushedtotheoff[O]position.Failuretodosomaycausedamagetotheprojector.

• Donotuseathree-phasepowersupply.Doingsomaycauseofmalfunction.

Firstconnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplugtotheACINterminaloftheprojector,andthenconnecttheotherplugofthesuppliedpowercordinthewalloutlet.

COMPUTER IN

MakesurethattheprongsarefullyinsertedintoboththeACINterminalandthewalloutlet.

Towalloutlet

Computercable(withferritecore)(soldcommercially)

Page 32: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

15

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

Using the Supplied Power CordsSelectthepowercordsuitableforyourcountryorregion.

ForEurope/Asia/SouthAmerica ForNorthAmerica

(120V) (200V)

(→page173)

Page 33: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

16

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Using the Power Cord StopperTopreventthepowercordfromaccidentlyremovingfromtheACINoftheprojector,attachthepowercordstopperto clamp the power cord.

CAUTION• Topreventthepowercordfromcomingloose,makesurethatalltheprongsofthepowercordarefullyinserted

intotheACINterminaloftheprojectorbeforeusingthepowercordstoppertofixthepowercord.Aloosecontactofthepowercordmaycauseafireorelectricshock.

Attaching the power cord stopper1. Raise up the power cord stopper and lay it over the power cord.

Powercordstopper

• Forreleasingthestopper,raiseupthestopperandlayitdowntotheoppositeside.

Page 34: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

17

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❸ Turning on the ProjectorNOTE:• Theprojectorhastwopowerswitches:AmainpowerswitchandaPOWERbutton(POWERONandOFFontheremotecontrol)•Turningontheprojector:1. Press the main power switch to the ON position (I).

Theprojectorwillgointostandbymode.

2. Press the POWER button .

Theprojectorwillbecomereadytouse.

•Turningofftheprojector:1. Press the POWER button.

Theconfirmationmessagewillbedisplayed.

2. Press the POWER button again.

Theprojectorwillgointostandbymode.

3. Press the main power switch to the OFF position (O).

Theprojectorwillbeturnedoff.

1.Removethelenscapfromthelensunit.

2. Press the main power switch to the ON position ( I ).

ThePOWERindicatorlightsupred.*

* ThisindicatesthattheSTANDBYmodeisin[NORMAL]setting.

(→page136,178)

WARNING

Theprojectorproducesastrong light.When turningonthepower,makesurenoonewithinprojectionrange islookingatthelens.

NOTE: • The[STANDBYMODE]settingwillbedisabledandtheprojectorwillgointothesleepmodewhenthenetworkserviceisutilizedortheprojectorreceivesHDBaseTsignal.Inthesleepmode,thefansin the projector rotate for the purpose of interior parts protection. Pleaserefertopage136 about the sleep mode.

Page 35: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

18

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

3. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control.

ThePOWERindicatorgoesfromasteadyredlighttoaflashingblue light, and thepicture isprojectedon thescreen.

TIP:• Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOURPASSWORD.” is displayed, itmeans that the [SECURITY]featureisturnedon.(→ page 45)

Afteryouturnonyourprojector,ensurethatthecomputerorvideosourceisturnedon.

NOTE:Thebluescreen([BLUE]background)isdisplayedwhennosignalisbeinginput(byfactorydefaultmenusettings).

Standby Blinking Power On

Steady red light Blinking blue light

Steady blue light

(→page178)

Performing Lens Calibration Afterinstallationorreplacementofthelens,besuretoperform[LENSCALIBRATION]bypressingandholdingtheSHUT-TER/CALIBRATIONbuttonontheprojectorcabinetforatleasttwosecondsorbyholdingtheCTLbuttonandpressingtheINFO/L-CALIB.buttonontheremotecontrol.Perform[LENSCALIBRATION]alsowhentroubleisfoundonthelensshiftmotion.Calibrationcorrectstheadjustablezoom,shift,andfocusrange.Ifcalibrationisnotperformed,youmaynotbeabletogetthebestfocusandzoomevenifyouadjustthefocusandzoomforthelens.WhileperformingLensCalibra-tion,theSTATUSindicatorflashesingreentwicepercycle.• Thefollowinglensesneedcalibration: NP16FL,NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZL,NP31ZL

Page 36: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

19

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)Whenyoufirstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectoneofthe30menulanguages.

To select a menu language, follow these steps:

1. Use the ▲, ▼, ◀ or ▶buttontoselectoneofthe30languagesfromthemenu.

2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.

After this has been done, you can proceed to themenuoperation.Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.(→[LANGUAGE]onpage84 and 114)

NOTE: • Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.- Iftheinternaltemperatureoftheprojectoristoohigh,theprojectordetectsabnormalhightemperature.Inthisconditiontheprojectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocooldown.

- IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→ page 126)

• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.(WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinlongcycles,theOFFTIMERisfunctionedandthepowercanbeturnedoff.)

Page 37: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

20

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❹ Selecting a SourceSelecting the computer or video sourceNOTE:Turnonthecomputerorvideosourceequipmentconnectedtotheprojector.

Detecting the Signal AutomaticallyPress theSOURCEbutton for 1 secondor longer. Theprojectorwillsearchfortheavailableinputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeasfollows:

HDMI→DisplayPort→BNC→BNC(CV)→BNC(Y/C)→COMUPTER→HDBaseT→SLOT→ …

• Pressitbrieflytodisplaythe[INPUT]screen.

Press the ▼/▲buttonstomatchthetargetinputterminalandthenpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtheinput.Todeletethemenudisplayinthe[INPUT]screen,presstheMENUorEXITbutton.

TIP:Ifnoinputsignalispresent,theinputwillbeskipped.

Using the Remote ControlPressanyoneof theHDMI,DisplayPort,COMPUTER2,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,COMPUTER1,NETWORK,orSLOTbuttons.• COMPUTER2buttonselectstheBNCINterminal.

• VIDEObuttonselectstheBNC(CV)inputterminal(CompositeVideo).

• S-VIDEObuttonselectstheBNC(Y/C)inputterminal(S-Video).

Page 38: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

21

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Selecting Default Source Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayedeachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP].3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SOURCEOPTIONS].4. Press the ▼buttonfourtimestoselect[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]screenwillbedisplayed.

(→page134)

5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbutton.

6. Press the EXIT button three times to close the menu.

7. Restart the projector.

Thesourceyouselectedinstep5willbeprojected.

NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[HDBaseT]willnotbeautomaticallyselected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[HDBaseT].

TIP:• WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINinputwillpowerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.

([AUTOPOWERONSELECT]→ page 137)• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallowsyoutosetupexternaldisplayeasilyandquickly.

Page 39: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

22

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❺ Adjusting the Picture Size and PositionUsethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfoot,thezoomringandthefocusringtoadjustthepicturesizeandposition.Inthischapterdrawingsandcablesareomittedforclarity.

Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontalposition[Lensshift](→page23)

Adjustingthefocus[Focus](→page26)

Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage[Zoom](→page31)

Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sheightandhorizontaltilt[Tiltfoot]*¹(→page32)

NOTE*1:Adjusttheprojectedimage’sheightusingthetiltfootwhenyouwanttoprojecttheimageatapositionhigherthanthelens shift adjustment range.

TIP:• Built-intestpatternscanbeconvenientlyusedforadjustingthepicturesizeandposition.(→ page 88) ApressoftheTESTbuttonwilldisplaythetestpattern.The◀ or ▶ button can select one test pattern. To close the test pattern,

change the source to another.

Page 40: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

23

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)

CAUTION• Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Performingadjustmentfromthefrontcouldexposeyoureyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.

• Keephandsawayfromthelensmountingportionwhileperformingalensshift.Failuretodosocouldresultinfingersbeingpinchedbythemovinglens.

NOTE:• ThelensshiftfunctionisnotavailableontheprojectorwitheitherNP16FLorNP39MLlensinstalled. ForusingNP16FL,setbackthelenstothehomeposition. ForusingNP39ML,select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(2)]→[LENSPOSITION]→[TYPE]ontheonscreenmenu,thelenswillbemovedtotheappropriatepositionautomatically.

• Shiftingthelenstothemaximuminobliqueanglewillcausetheedgesoftheimagetobecomedarkorwillcausedarkshadows.

Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet1. Press the LENS SHIFT/HOME POSITION button.

The[LENSSHIFT]screenwillbedisplayed.

Page 41: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

24

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

2. Press the ▼▲◀ or ▶ button.

Usethe▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

• Returningthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition

PressandholdtheLENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITIONbuttonfor2secondstoreturnthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition(nearlycenterposition)

Page 42: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

25

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting with the remote control1.HoldtheCTLbuttonandpresstheECO/L-SHIFTbutton.

The[LENSSHIFT]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀ or ▶ button.

Usethe▼▲◀▶buttonstomovetheprojectedimage.

NOTE:LensCalibrationIfthepoweroftheprojectoriswronglyshutdownduringthemotionoflensshift,itmayshiftthehomepositionofthelensandmaycauseofmalfunction.TheSTATUSindicatorflashedinOrangetoinformthiskindoftroubleoccurrence.(→ page 178)Inthiscase, perform lens calibration.Lenscalibrationprocedures1.Powerontheprojector.2.Pressthe(SHUTTER/CALIBRATION)buttononthecontrolpanelover2secondsorkeeppressingtheCTLbuttonandpresstheINFO/L-CALIB.buttonontheremotecontrol.

Calibrationisperformed.

TIP:• Thediagrambelowshowsthelensshiftadjustmentrange(projectionmode:desktopfront).Toraisetheprojectionpositionhigherthanthis,adjustbythetiltfoot.(→ page 32)

100%V

50%V

30%V

100%H

20%H

10%H

10%H

20%H

Heightofprojectedimage

Widthofprojectedimage

Descriptionofsymbols:Vindicatesvertical(heightoftheprojectedimage),Hindicateshorizontal(widthoftheprojectedimage).

Page 43: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

26

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Focus

Applicable lens unit: NP16FL/NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL1.PresstheFOCUS+/−buttonuntilyoucanobtainthebestfocus.

(TheFOCUSadjustmentbarwillbedisplayedon.)

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,pressonVOL/FOCUS(+)or(−)button.

• ◀or▶buttonsonthecabinetortheremotecontrolarealsoavailabletoadjustFOCUSwhiletheFOCUSadjustmentbarisdisplayedon.

TIP:Toobtainthebestfocus,performthefollowing(forpermanentinstallation)Preparation:Warmuptheprojectorforonehour.

1.UsetheFOCUS+/−buttonstomakesureyouobtainthebestfocus.Ifyoudonot,movetheprojectorbackandforth.

2. Selectthe[TESTPATTERN]fromthemenuanddisplaythetestpattern.(→ page 88)

• YoucanalsousetheTESTbuttonontheremotecontroltodisplaythetestpattern.

3.KeeppressingtheFOCUS−buttonuntilthegridofthetextpatternismadeinvisible.

• TheFOCUSadjustmentbardisplayingpositioncanbeshiftedorbeturnedofftemporarily.(→page36,37)

4.KeeppressingtheFOCUS+buttonuntilyouobtainthebestfocus.

Ifyouadjustbeyondthebestfocalpoint,gobacktostep3andrepeattheprocedures.

Page 44: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

27

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Applicable lens unit: NP31ZL1. Focusontheprojectedimagearoundtheopticalaxis.(Poweredfocus)

PresstheFOCUS+/−buttonuntilyoucanobtainthebestfocus.

(TheFOCUSadjustmentbarwillbedisplayedon.)

Thedrawingbelowshowsanexamplewhentheprojectedimageisshiftedupward.Inthiscasetheopticalaxisisatthebottomedgeoftheprojectedimage.

Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet

PresstheFOCUS+/−BUTTONonthecontrolpanel

Adjusting with the remote control

PresstheVOL/FOCUSbuttonholdingtheCTLbutton

• ◀or▶buttonsonthecabinetortheremotecontrolarealsoavailabletoadjustFOCUSwhiletheFOCUSadjustmentbarisdisplayedon.

Opticalaxis

* Whenthelensisatthecenterposition,theopticalaxisisatthecenteroftheimage.Inthiscase,adjustthefocusatthecenteroftheprojectedimage.

Page 45: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

28

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

2.Adjustthefocusattheedgesoftheprojectedimage.(Manualfocus)

Turntheedgefocusringclockwiseorcounterclockwise.

Opticalaxis

Thiscompletesadjustingtheprojectedimage’soverallfocus.

NOTE:TheNP31ZLsupportstheLensMemoryfunction,whichallowsyoutostoreadjustedvalueforLensShift,Zoom,andFocus.IfyouaccidentallymovetheEdgefocusring(drawingshownbelow)afterhavingstoredadjustedvalues,theadjustedvaluesstoredintheLensMemorywillnotbecorrectlyapplied.

Edgefocusring

Afterhavingremovedthelensfromtheprojectorandmounteditback,calluptheadjustedvaluesstoredintheLensMemoryandthenfollowStep2intheprocedureabovetoadjustthefocusattheedgesoftheprojectedimageagain.

Page 46: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

29

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

TIP:Toobtainthebestfocus,performthefollowing(forpermanentinstallation)Preparation:Warmuptheprojectorforonehour.1.PresstheFOCUS+/−buttonstochecktheadjustablefocusrange.Forcheckingitbytheremotecontrol,pressandholdtheCTLbuttonandpressVOL./FOCUS+/−button.Iftheprojectorinuseisnotwithintheadjustablefocusrange,movetheprojectorbackand forth.

2.Selectthe[TESTPATTERN]fromthemenuanddisplaythetestpattern.(→ page 88)• Fordisplayingthetestpatternbytheremotecontrol,pressTESTbutton.

3.KeeppressingtheFOCUS−buttonuntilthegridofthetextpatternbecomesinvisible.• TheFOCUSadjustmentbardisplayingpositioncanbeshiftedorbeturnedofftemporarily.(→ page 36, 37)

4.KeeppressingtheFOCUS+buttonuntilyouobtainthebestfocus. Forobtainingthebestfocusbytheremotecontrol,presstheVOL./FOCUS+buttonwhileholdingtopresstheCTLbutton. Ifyouadjustbeyondthebestfocalpoint,gobacktostep3andrepeattheprocedures.5. Turn the edge focus ring clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the focus at the edges of the projected image.

Applicablelensunit:NP39ML1. Focusontheprojectedimagearoundtheopticalaxis.(Poweredfocus)

Theopticalaxisisatthebottomoftheimage.

PresstheFOCUS+/−buttonuntilyoucanobtainthebestFOCUSaroundtheopticalaxis.(TheFOCUSadjust-mentbarwillbedisplayedon.)

Inanotherway,presstheVOL/FOCUS+/−buttonwhileholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontrol.

Opticalaxis

• ◀ or ▶buttonsonthecabinetortheremotecontrolarealsoavailabletoadjustFOCUSwhiletheFOCUSadjust-ment bar is displayed on.

Page 47: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

30

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

2.Adjustthefocusattheedgesoftheprojectedimage.

PresseithertheZOOM+/−buttononthecontrolpanelortheD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttonwhileholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonontheremotecontroluntilyoucanobtainthebestfocusattheedgesoftheprojectedimage.(TheZOOMadjustmentbarwillbedisplayedon.)

Focusaroundtheopticalaxissetatstep1isremainedunchanged.

Opticalaxis

3.Repeatsteps1and2untiltheoptimalfocuscanbeobtainedonwholeimage.

TIP:Toobtainthebestfocus,performthefollowing(forpermanentinstallation)Preparation:Warmuptheprojectorforonehour.

1.UsetheFOCUS+/−buttonstomakesureyouobtainthebestfocus.Ifyoudonot,movetheprojectorbackandforth.

2. Selectthe[TESTPATTERN]fromthemenuanddisplaythetestpattern.(→ page 88)

• YoucanalsousetheTESTbuttonontheremotecontroltodisplaythetestpattern.

3.KeeppressingtheFOCUS−buttonuntilthegridofthetextpatternismadeinvisible.

• TheFOCUSadjustmentbardisplayingpositioncanbeshiftedorbeturnedofftemporarily.(→page36,37)

4.KeeppressingtheFOCUS+buttonuntilyouobtainthebestfocus.

Ifyouadjustbeyondthebestfocalpoint,gobacktostep3andrepeattheprocedures.

5.PresstheZOOM+/−buttonforadjustingtheedgesoftheprojectedimage.

PresstheD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttonholdingtopresstheCTLbuttonforadjustingitbytheremotecontrol.

Repeatsteps1to5untiltheoptimalfocuscanbeobtainedonwholeimage.

Page 48: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

31

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Zoom

Applicable lens units: NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL/NP31ZL1. Press the ZOOM +/− button.

TheZOOMadjustmentbarwillbedisplayedon.

• Ontheremotecontrol,whilepressingontheCTLbutton,presstheD-ZOOM/ZOOM(+)or(−)button.

Thezoomisadjusted.

• ◀or▶buttonsonthecabinetortheremotecontrolareavailabletoadjustZOOMwhiletheZOOMadjustmentbarisdisplayedon.

Page 49: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

32

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

Adjusting the Tilt Foot1. Theposition toproject imagemaybeadjustedby the tilt foot

positionedatfourcornersofthecabinetbottom.

Thetiltfootheightcanbeadjustedbyitsturn.

“Toadjusttheheightoftheprojectedimage”

Theheightoftheprojectedimageisadjustedbyturningeitherfrontorreartiltfoot.

“Iftheprojectedimageistilted”

Iftheprojectedimageistilted,turneitherleftorrighttiltfoottoadjusttheimagesothatitislevel.

• Iftheprojectedimageisdistorted,see“3-8CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page42) and“[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]”(→page107).

• Thetiltfootcanbelengthenedbyamaximumof48mm.

• Thetiltfootcanbeusedtotilttheprojectorbyamaximumof6°.

NOTE:• Donotlengthenthetiltfootanymorethan50mm/1.9".Doingsowillmakethetiltfeet’smountsectionunstableandcouldcausethetiltfeettocomeofftheprojector.

• Payattentiontolengthenorshortentwotiltfootatfrontatthesametime.Samefor the rear foot, otherwise, the weight of the projector is loaded on one side and it may cause of damage to it.

• Donotuse the tilt foot foranypurposeother thanadjusting theprojector’sprojection angle.

Handlingthetiltfootimproperly,suchascarryingtheprojectorbygraspingthetilt foot or hooking it onto a wall using the tilt foot, could damage the projector.

• PleasechecklevelofthelensunitWhenthelensunitNP39MLisinstalledonsince the lens unit may sligtly incline in left or right.

Tiltfoot(thereisonemoreintherear)

Up Down

Page 50: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

33

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❻ Optimizing Computer Signal AutomaticallyAdjusting the Image Using Auto AdjustWhenanimagefromHDMIIN,DisplayPortIN,BNCINterminal(analogRGB),COMPUTERIN,orHDBaseTisbeingprojected,andtheedgeiscutoffortheimagequalityispoor,thisbuttoncanbeusedtoautomaticallyoptimizetheprojectionimageonthescreen.

PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.

[Poorpicture] [Adjustedpicture]

NOTE:Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]manually.(→ page 96, 97)

• Ifyoucannotobtainanoptimizedpicture,referpage182.

Page 51: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

34

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

❼ Turning off the Projector1. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet

or the POWER OFF button on the remote control.

The[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?/CARBONSAV-INGS-SESSION0.000[g-CO2]]messagewillappear.

2. Press one among the ENTER, the (POWER), and the POWER OFF button.

When theprojector is inSTANDBYMODE, thePOWERindicator lights up red. (When [STANDBYMODE] is in[NORMAL]setting)

• Ifyoudonotwanttoturnoff,select[NO]by◀/▶buttonandpressENTER.

3. Make sure the projector is in STANDBY MODE, then turn offthemainpowerswitch(○ OFF)

ThePOWERindicatorwillgooffandthemainpowerwillturnoff.

• While thePOWER indicator is blinkingblue in shortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.

Power On

Steady blue light

Standby

Steady red light

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaytemporarilyoverheatiftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththemainpowerswitchortheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedwhiletheprojectorisinoperationorthecoolingfanisrunning.Handlewithcare.

Page 52: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

35

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

NOTE:• Donotunplugthepowercordfromtheprojectororfromthepoweroutletwhileanimageisbeingprojected.Doingsocoulddeterioratetheprojector’sACINterminalorthepowerplug’scontact.ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,usetheprojector’smainpowerswitch,apowerstripequippedwithaswitch,orabreaker.

• DonotturnoffthemainpowerswitchordisconnecttheACpowersupplywithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentsorsettingchangesandclosingthemenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.

❽ After UsePreparation:Makesurethattheprojectoristurnedoff.

1. Unplug the power cord.

2. Disconnect any other cables.

3. Mount the lens cap on the lens.

4.Beforemovingtheprojector,screwinthetiltfootiftheyhavebeenlengthened.

Page 53: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

36

3. Convenient Features❶ Turn off the light of the projector (LENS SHUTTER)PresstheSHUTTER/CALIBRATIONbutton.Thelightsourcewillturnofftemporarily.Pressagaintoallowthescreentobecomeilluminatedagain.• Anotherway toshut the lightsourceoff is topress theSHUTTER

button on the remote control.

• Youcansettheprojectionlighttograduallyfadeinorout.

NOTE: • [LENSSHUTTER]isfunctionedbyquickpress.IfpressandholdtheSHUTTER/CALIBRATIONbuttonover2seconds,itwillstarttheLENSCALIBRATION.

❷ Turning off the Image (AV-MUTE)PresstheAV-MUTEbuttontoturnofftheimageforashortperiodoftime.Pressagaintorestoretheimage.

TIP:• Thevideowilldisappearbutnotthemenudisplay.

❸ Turning Off the On-Screen Menu (On-Screen Mute)ApressoftheON-SCREENbuttonontheremotecontrolwillhidetheon-screenmenu,thesourcedisplayandothermessages.Pressagainto restore them.

TIP:• Toconfirmthattheon-screenmuteisturnedon,presstheMENUbutton.Iftheon-screenmenuisnotdisplayedeventhoughyoupresstheMENUbutton,itmeanstheon-screenmuteisturnedon.

• Theon-screenmuteismaintainedevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff,• HoldingdowntheMENUbuttonontheprojectorcabinetforatleast10secondswillturnofftheon-screenmute.

Page 54: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

37

3. Convenient Features

❹ Shift the On-Screen Menu displaying position1. Press the MENU button.

TheOn-ScreenMenuwillbedisplayedon.

2. Move the cursor by the ▶buttontothe[SETUP]andthenpresstheENTERbutton. Thecursorwillmovetothe[MENU1].

3. Move the cursor by the ▶buttontothe[MENU2].

4. Move the cursor by the ▼buttontothe[MENUPOSITION]andthenpresstheENTER. TheOn-ScreenMenuwillgoesintotheMENUPOSITIONsetupscreen.

5.MovethecursoreitherTO[HORIZONTALPOSITION]or[VERTICALPOSITION]bypressing▼ or ▲ button and then press ◀/▶buttontoshifttheOn-ScreenMenu.

ForfinishingthesettingontheOn-ScreenMenu,presstheMENUbuttonontheremotecontrol.

TIP:• Oncetheprojectorispoweredoff,theOn-ScreenMenudisplayingpositionwillberesettothedefaultfactorysettingposition.• Thisfunctiondoesnotinfluencetothedisplaypositionofinputterminalinformationandmessage.

❺ Freezing a PictureHoldtheCTLbuttonandpressthePIP/FREEZEbuttontofreezeapicture.Pressagaintoresumemotion.

NOTE:Theimageisfrozenbuttheoriginalvideoisstillplayingahead.

Page 55: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

38

3. Convenient Features

❻ Magnifying a PictureYoucanmagnifythepictureuptofourtimes.

NOTE: • Dependingonaninputsignal,themaximummagnificationmaybelessthanfourtimes,orthefunctionmayberestricted.

Todoso:

1.PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.

2. Press the ▲▼◀▶ button. Theareaofthemagnifiedimagewillbemoved

3. Press the D-ZOOM (−) button.

EachtimetheD-ZOOM(−)buttonispressed,theimageisdemagni-fied.

NOTE: • Theimagewillbemagnifiedordemagnifiedatthecenterofthescreen.• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnification.

Page 56: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

39

3. Convenient Features

❼ Changing LIGHT MODE/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using LIGHT MODE [LIGHT MODE]Wheneither[ECO1]or[ECO2]in[LIGHTMODE]isselected,motionnoiseoftheprojectoriscutdownbyloweringbrightnessofitslightsource.Bysavingenergyconsumption,theCO2 emission from this projector can be reduced.

LIGHTMODEIconatthebottomof the menu

Description

NORMAL 100%brightnessThescreenwillbebrightlylit.

ECO1 Brightnesswillbeatabout80%.Thecoolingfanwillalsoslowdownaccordingly.Lower power consumption

ECO2 Brightnesswillbeatabout50%.Thecoolingfanwillalsoslowdownaccordingly.Lower power consumption considerably

Toturnonthe[LIGHTMODE],dothefollowing:1. Press LIGHT button on the cabinet.

• Inanotherway,pressECO/L-SHIFTbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The[LIGHTMODE]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ENTER button.

The[LIGHTMODE]selectionscreenwillbedisplayed.

3. Use the ▼▲ buttons to make a selection, and press the ENTER button.

Thedisplaywillreturntothe[LIGHTMODE]screenandtheselectedoptionwillbeapplied.

PresstheMENUbuttontoreturntotheoriginalscreen.

Page 57: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

40

3. Convenient Features

NOTE: • The[LIGHTMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu. Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(1)]→[LIGHTMODE]→[LIGHTMODE].• Thelightmodulehoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME]onthemenu.Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysablue,blackorlogoscreen,[LIGHTMODE]willautomaticallyswitchto[ECO].

• Thisprojectorequipsthesensortodetectatmosphericpressureandtemperatureandtheprojectorcontrolsthepowerbasedonthedetectedvalues.Whentheprojectorisusedinhighaltitudeandhightemperature,thelightsourcebrightnessbecomeslowerregardlessofthesettingforLIGHTMODE.Thisiscalled“ForcedECOMODE”.PleasereferthebelowtablefortheconditionsandoutputpowerinForcedECOMODE.

Altitudes Atmospherictemperature

5–25°C(41–77°F)

26–30°C(78–86°F)

31–35°C(87–95°F)

36–40°C(96–104°F)

1600–3000m(5500–10000ft)

100% 90% 80% 70%

1200–1600m(4000–5500ft)

100% 90% 80%

0–1200m(0–4000ft)

100% 80%

• WhentheprojectorisintheForcedLIGHTMODE,thepicturebrightnessdecreasesslightlyandtheTEMP.indicatorlightsorange.AtthesametimetheThermometersymbol[ ]isdisplayedatthebottomofthescreen.

Whentheprojectorcomesbacktonormaltemperature,theForcedECOMODEiscancelledandthe[LIGHTMODE]returnsto[NORMAL]mode.Whentheatmosphericpressuresensordetectsheightover1200m,theHIGHsymbol[ ]willbedisplayedat the bottom of the screen.

Page 58: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

41

3. Convenient Features

Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO2emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[LIGHTMODE]issettoeither[ECO1]or[ECO2].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].

Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO2emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcanchecktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page139)

The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO2 emission reduction between the time of changingtoLIGHTMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.

TIP:• TheformulashownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO2emissionreduction.AmountofCO2emissionreduction=(Powerconsumptionin[NORMAL]LIGHTMODE–Powerconsumptionincurrentsetting)×CO2conversionfactor.*Whenanenergy-savingLIGHTMODEisselected,ortheLensShutterisused,therewillbeafurtherreductioninCO2 emission.* CalculationforamountofCO2emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO2EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,2008Edition”.

• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[LIGHTMODE]isturnedonoroff.

Page 59: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

42

3. Convenient Features

❽ Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion [CORNERSTONE]

Usethe[CORNERSTONE]featuretocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleftorrightsideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.

1.Projectanimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheraster.

Projectedimage

Thedrawingshowstheupperrightcorner.

2.Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.

3. Press the 3D REFORM button.

Displaythe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]screenoftheon-screenmenu.

4.Movethecursoronto[MODE]by▼ button and press the ENTER.

Themodeselectionscreenwilldisplayedon.

Page 60: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

43

3. Convenient Features

5. Press the ▼buttontoalignwiththe[CORNERSTONE]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

Thedrawingshowstheupperlefticon( )isselected.

Thescreenwillswitchtothe[CORNERSTONE]screen.

6. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select one icon (▲) which points in the direction you wish to move the projected imageframe.

7. Press the ENTER button.

8. Use the ▲▼◀▶buttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.

9. Press the ENTER button.

10. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select another icon which points in the direction.

11.Repeatstepsfrom7to10tocompletethecornerstoneadjustment.

12.Onthe[CORNERSTONE]screen,select[EXIT]orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrol.

Page 61: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

44

3. Convenient Features

Theconfirmationscreenisdisplayed.

13. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton. Thiscompletesthe[CORNERSTONE]correction.

• Returningtothe[CORNERSTONE]screen,select[CANCEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: • Eveniftheinstallationangleischangedwhentheprojectoristurnedonagain,thecorrectionvaluesintheprevioustimehasbeen

maintained.• Carryouteitheroneofthefollowingactionstocleartheadjustmentvalueof[CORNERSTONE].• InStep12,select[RESET]andthenpresstheENTERbutton.• Inthestate[CORNERSTONE]hasbeenselectedfor[MODE]inthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]:• Pressthe3DREFORMbuttonfor2ormoreseconds.• Run[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]→[RESET]intheon-screenmenu.

• UsingCORNERSTONEcorrectioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.

Page 62: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

45

3. Convenient Features

❾ Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeywordisset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-jectorcannotprojectanimage.•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.

To enable the Security function:

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[MENU(1)].

3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[CONTROL].4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.

5. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[SECURITYKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.

6. Typeyourkeywordinacombinationofthefour▲▼◀▶ buttons and press the ENTER button.

NOTE:Akeywordmustbe4to10digitsinlength.

Page 63: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

46

3. Convenient Features

The[CONFIRMKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.

NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.7. Typeyourkeywordinthesamecombinationof▲▼◀▶ buttons and press the ENTER button.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheSECURITYfunctionhasbeenenabled.

Toturnontheprojectorwhen[SECURITY]isenabled:

1. Press the button.

• Ifusingtheremotecontrol,pressthePOWERONbutton.

Theprojectorwillbeturnedonanddisplayamessagetotheeffectthattheprojectorislocked.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.

NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off or unplugging the power cord.

Page 64: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

47

3. Convenient Features

TodisabletheSECURITYfunction:

1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.

3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheSECURITYKEYWORDscreenwillbedisplayed.

4. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button.

Whenthecorrectkeywordisentered,theSECURITYfunctionwillbedisabled.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequestcode.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConfirmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]is a request code.

Page 65: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

48

3. Convenient Features

❿ Projecting 3D videosThisprojectorsupports3DemitterandDLP-Linkglasses.

CAUTION

Health precautionsBeforeuse,pleasemakesuretoreadanyhealthprecautionsthatmaybestatedintheoperatingmanualsenclosedwiththe3Deyewearand3Dvideosoftware(Blu-rayplayer,games,computeranimationfiles,etc.).Pleasetakenoteofthefollowinginordertoavoidadversehealtheffects.• Pleasedonotusethe3Deyewearforpurposesotherthantowatch3Dvideos.• Pleasekeepadistanceofatleast2mawayfromthescreenwhenwatchingvideos.Watchingavideotooclosetothescreenwillincreaseeyefatigue.

• Pleasedonotwatchvideoscontinuouslyforalongperiodoftime.Pleasetakea15minutes’breakaftereveryhourofwatching.

• Pleaseconsultadoctorbeforewatchingifyouoranyofyourfamilymembershaveahistoryofsufferingfromseizurescausedbylightsensitivity.

• Pleasestopwatchingimmediatelyandtakearestwhenyoufeelphysicallyunwellwhilewatching(vomiting,gid-diness,nausea,headaches,soreeyes,blurredvision,crampsanddumbnessinthelimbs,etc.).Pleaseconsulta doctor if the symptoms persist.

• Pleasewatcha3Dvideodirectlyinfrontofthescreen.Ifyouwatcha3Dvideoobliquelyfromthesides,thismayresultinphysicalandeyefatigue.

Procedure to watch 3D videos using this projector

Using a 3D emitterThisprojectorcanbeusedtowatchvideosin3Dusingcommercially-availableactiveshutter-type3Deyewear.Inordertosynchronizethe3Dvideoandeyewear,acommercially-available3Demitterneedstobeconnectedtotheprojector(ontheprojectorside).The3Deyewearreceivesinformationfromthe3Demitterandperformsopeningandclosingontheleftandright.• Thedefaultfactorysettingis[OTHERS].

3D eyewear and 3D emitter preparationsPleaseuseanactiveshutter-type3DeyewearthatconformswiththeVESAstandard.Acommercially-availableRFtypemadebyXpandisrecommended.

3D eyewear ������������ Xpand X105-RF-X23D emitter �������������� Xpand AD025-RF-X1

1.Connectyour3Demittertothe3DSYNCterminaloftheprojector.

2. Switch on the projector.

3.Runthe3Dvideosoftware.

The3Dvideowillbeprojected.

Thedefaultfactorysettingis[AUTO].When3Dimageisnotprojected,itmaycauseinputsignaldoesnotcontain3Ddetectionsignaloritcannotbedetectedbythisprojector.Inthiscase,pleasesetuptheformatmanually.

(1)PresstheMENUbutton.

Page 66: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

49

3. Convenient Features

TheMENUwillbedisplayed.

(2)Pressthe▶button,select[ADJUST],thenpressENTER.

[PICTURE]willbehighlighted.

(3)Usethe▶buttontoselect[3DSETTINGS].

The[3DSETTINGS]screenwillbedisplayed.

(4)Usethe▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[FORMAT],thenpressENTER.

The[FORMAT]screenwillbedisplayed.

(5)Usethe▼/▲buttonstoalignthecursoratoneamongformatoptions,thenpressENTERforsettingitup.

Thedisplaywillreturntothe[FORMAT]screen.

PresstheMENUbuttontoreturntotheoriginalscreen.

• The3Dcautionmessagescreenwillbedisplayedwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo(defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped).Pleasereadthe“HealthPrecautions”onthepreviouspagetowatchvideosinthecorrectmanner.Thescreenwilldisappearafter60secondsorwhentheENTERbuttonispressed.(→page115)

4. Turnonthepowersupplyofthe3Deyewearandweartheeyeweartowatchthevideo.

Anormalvideowillbeshownwhena2Dvideoisinput.

Towatcha3Dvideoin2D,select[OFF(2D)]inthe[FORMAT]screenmentionedabovein(3).

Page 67: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

50

3. Convenient Features

NOTE:• Uponswitchingto3Dimage,thefollowingfunctionswillbecancelledanddisabled.[BLANKING],[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[EDGEBLENDING]([GEOMETRICCORRECTION]and[EDGEBLENDING]adjustmentvalueswillbemaintained.)

• Theoutputmaynotautomaticallyswitchtoa3Dvideodependingonthe3Dinputsignal.• ChecktheoperatingconditionsdescribedintheusermanualoftheBlu-rayplayer.• PleaseconnecttheDINterminalofthe3Demittertothe3DSYNCofthemainprojector.• The3Deyewearallowsvideostobeviewedin3Dbyreceivingsynchronizedopticalsignalsoutputfromthe3Demitter. Asaresult,the3Dimagequalitymaybeaffectedbyconditionssuchasthebrightnessofthesurroundings,screensize,viewing

distance, etc.• Whenplayinga3Dvideosoftwareonacomputer,the3DimagequalitymaybeaffectedifthecomputerCPUandgraphicschipperformancearelow.Pleasechecktherequiredoperatingenvironmentofthecomputerthatisstatedintheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Dvideosoftware.

• Dependingonthesignal,[FORMAT]and[L/RINVERT]maynotbeabletobeselected.Pleasechangethesignalinthatcase.

UsingDLP®LinkUseDLP®Linkglassesorothercompatiblecommercially-availableliquidcrystalshutterspectacles.

1.Connectavideodevicetotheprojector.

2. Switch on the projector.

3.Change[3DGLASSES]settingto[DLP®Link].

NOTE:• If3Dcontentisplayedbackonyourcomputerandtheperformanceispoor,itmaybecausedbytheCPUorgraphicschip.Inthiscaseyoumayhavedifficultyseeingthe3Dimagesastheywereintended.Checktoseeifyourcomputermeetstherequirementsprovidedinyouruser’smanualincludedwithyour3Dcontent.

• TheDLP®Linkcompatible3Deyeglassesallowyoutoview3Dimagesbyreceivingsynchsignals,whichareincludedinlefteyeandrighteyeimages,reflectedfromthescreen.Dependingonenvironmentsorconditionssuchastheambientbrightness,screensizeorviewingdistance,the3Deyeglassesmayfailtoreceivesynchsignals,causingpoor3Dimages.

• Whenthe3Dmodeisenabled,theKeystonecorrectionrangewillbenarrower.• Whenthe3Dmodeisenabled,thefollowingsettingsareinvalid. [WALLCOLOR],[PRESET],[REFERENCE],[COLORTEMPERATURE],[DYNAMICCONTRAST],[BrilliantColor]• Signalsotherthanthoselistedin“CompatibleInputSignalList”onpage168 and 169willbeoutofrangeordisplayedin2D.

Page 68: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

51

3. Convenient Features

When videos cannot be viewed in 3DPleasecheckthefollowingpointswhenvideoscannotbeviewedin3D.Pleasealsoreadtheoperatingmanualattachedtothe3Deyewear.

Possible reasons Solutions

The selected signal does not support 3D output� Please change the video signal input to one that supports 3D�

The format for the selected signal is turned to [OFF(2D)]� Please change the format in the on-screen menu to [AUTO] or a format that supports 3D�

A eyewear that is not supported by the projector is being used� Please purchase a commercially-available 3D eyewear or 3D emit-ter (recommended)� (→ page 48)

Please check the following points when a video cannot be viewed in 3D using a 3D eyewear that is supported by the projector�

The power supply of the 3D eyewear is turned off� Please turn on the power supply of the 3D eyewear�

The internal battery of the 3D eyewear is flat� Please charge or replace the battery�

The viewer is located too far away from the screen� Please get closer to the screen until the video can be seen in 3D�

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�

Due to multiple 3D projectors working at the same time in the vicinity, the projectors may interfere with one another� Alter-natively, there may be a bright light source near the screen�

Please maintain sufficient distance between the projectors�

Please keep the light source away from the screen�

Please turn the L/R INVERT in the on-screen menu to [OFF]�

Please check the following points when videos played back on the computer cannot be viewed in 3D�

Settings on the computer are not compatible with 3D video playback�

Check to make sure that settings on the computer meet require-ments for 3D video playback�

Image resolution on the computer cannot be recognized by the projector as 3D video�

Change the image resolution on the computer to one that the projector can recognize as 3D video�

The vertical scan rate on the computer cannot be recognized by the projector as 3D video�

Change the vertical scan rate on the computer to 60 Hz or 120 Hz�

There is an obstacle between the optical receiver of the 3D eye-wear and the 3D emitter�

Please remove the obstacle�

The 3D format of the 3D video contents is not supported� Please check with the company selling the 3D video contents�

Page 69: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

52

3. Convenient Features

⓫ Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP BrowserOverviewTheHTTPServerfunctionprovidessettingsandoperationsfor:1. Settingforwirednetwork(NETWORKSETTINGS)

TousewiredLANconnection,connecttheprojectortothecomputerwithacommerciallyavailableLANcable.(→page153)

2. Setting Alert Mail (ALERT MAIL)

Whentheprojectorisconnectedtoawirednetwork,errormessageswillbesentviae-mail.

3. Operating the projector

Poweron/off,selectinginput,volumecontrol,pictureadjustments,andlenscontrolarepossible.

4. SettingPJLinkPASSWORD,AMXBEACON,andCRESTRON.

AccesstotheHTTPserverfunctionisavailable:• StarttheWebbrowseronthecomputerviathenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorandenterthefollowing

URL :

http://<the projector’s IP address> /index.html

TIP:ThefactorydefaultsettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].

NOTE: • Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournetwork. Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedinrapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-tor.

• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourwebbrowser(orclearthecache).

• Thisprojectoruses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwillvarydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelpfilesandtheotherinformationprovidedinyoursoftware.

Preparation before UseConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page153)Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthesettingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeensetwillnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbereflectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.

Page 70: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

53

3. Convenient Features

Handling of the Address for Operation via a BrowserRegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationoftheprojectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecor-respondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”fileofthecomputerbeingused.

Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://192.168.73.1/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT

POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.ON ������������������������� Power is switched on�OFF ������������������������ Power is switched off�

VOLUME:Cannotbeusedforthisdevice.

AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.PICTURE ON ���������� Mutes the video�PICTURE OFF ��������� Cancels the video muting�SOUND ON ������������ Cannot be used for this device�SOUND OFF ����������� Cannot be used for this device�ALL ON ������������������ Mutes the video functions�ALL OFF ����������������� Cancels the muting of the video functions�

Page 71: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

54

3. Convenient Features

PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.BRIGHTNESS ▲ ���� Increases the brightness adjustment value�BRIGHTNESS ▼ ���� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�CONTRAST ▲ �������� Increases the contrast adjustment value�CONTRAST ▼ �������� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�COLOR ▲ �������������� Increases the color adjustment value�COLOR ▼ �������������� Decreases the color adjustment value�HUE ▲ ������������������� Increases the hue adjustment value�HUE ▼ ������������������� Decreases the hue adjustment value�SHARPNESS ▲ ����� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�SHARPNESS ▼ ����� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page95)

SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputterminaloftheprojector.HDMI ��������������������� Switches to the HDMI IN terminal�DisplayPort ������������ Switches to the DisplayPort IN�BNC ����������������������� Switch to BNC IN video input�BNC(CV) ���������������� Switch to BNC (CV) video input�BNC(Y/C) ��������������� Switch to BNC (Y/C) video input�COMPUTER ����������� Switches to the COMPUTER IN terminal�HDBaseT ���������������� Switch to image input sent from a transmission device that supports HDBaseT�SLOT ���������������������� The projector switches to video input from the optional board when an optional board (sold separately) is

equipped on�

PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.LIGHT HOURS USED ����������Displays how many hours the light module has been used�ERROR STATUS ������������������Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�

LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).

Page 72: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

55

3. Convenient Features

NETWORK SETTINGS

•SETTINGS

WIRED

SETTING SetforwiredLAN.

APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLAN.

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.

DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection

DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.

DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassign IPaddressofDNSserverconnected to theprojector.

AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

Page 73: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

56

3. Convenient Features

•NAME

PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorsothatyourcomputercanidentify theprojector.Aprojector name must be 16 alphanumeric characters or less. TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe15 alphanumeric characters or less.

DOMAINNAME Enterthedomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainnamemust be 60 alphanumeric characters or less.

•ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroferrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwiredLAN.PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:

Subject:[Projector]ProjectorInformationTHECOOLINGFANHASSTOPPED.[INFORMATION]PROJECTORNAME:PX1004ULSeriesLIGHTHOURSUSED:0000[H]

SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.

SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.

RECIPIENT’SADDRESS1,2,3

Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.

TESTMAIL SendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornotNOTE:• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork

settings are correct.• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.

Page 74: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

57

3. Convenient Features

•NETWORKSERVICE

PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.

HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.Whenapasswordissetup,youwillbepromptedforyourusername(arbitrary)andpasswordduringLOGON.

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.

ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourpassword,contactyourdealer.Pleasecheck24digitsserialnumber(XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX)displayed on the column for the password.

*WhatisPJLink?PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.ThisstandardprotocolisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

CRESTRON

•ROOMVIEWformanagingfromthecomputer.

DISABLE DisablesROOMVIEW.

ENABLE EnablesROOMVIEW.

•CRESTRONCONTROLformanagingfromthecontroller.

DISABLE DisablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

ENABLE EnablesCRESTRONCONTROL.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCRESTRONSERVER.

IPID SetyourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

•INFORMATION

WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.

UPDATE Reflectsettingswhentheyarechanged.

Page 75: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

58

3. Convenient Features

LENS CONTROL

•CONTROL

FOCUS ◀/▶ AdjustFOCUSoftheprojectedimage.

ZOOM ◀/▶ Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage.

SHIFT ▼▲◀▶ Adjusttheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontalposition.

HOME Returnthelensshiftpositiontothehomeposition.

SHUTTER Turnoffthelightsourcetemporarily.

SHUTTER Turnonthelightsource.

CALIB. Correcttheadjustablezoom,focusandlesshiftrange.

•LENSMEMORY

STORE Storethecurrentadjustedvaluesinmemoryforeachinputsignal.

MOVE AppliestheadjustedvaluesofLENSSHIFT,ZOOM,andFOCUStothecurrentsignal.

RESET Returntheadjustedvaluedtothelastcondition.

•REF.LENSMEMORY

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 Selectastored[PROFILE]number.

STORE StoreeachadjustedvalueofLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSfortheselectedprofileasthecommonvaluesforeveryinputsignal.

MOVE MovethelenstothestoredvaluesofLENSSHIFT,ZOOM,andFOCUSfortheselectedprofile.

Page 76: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

59

3. Convenient Features

RESET Resetselected[REF.LENSMEMORY]fortheselected[PROFILE]tothedefaultfactorysettings.

LOADBYSIGNAL

OFF Ifinputsignalisswitched,thelenswillnotshifttothelesshift,zoomandfocusval-uesfortheselected[PROFILE]number.

ON Ifinputsignalisswitched,thelenswillshifttothelensshift,zoomandfocusvaluesfortheselected[PROFILE]number.Ifnoadjustedvalueshavebeenstoredto[LENSMEMORY],thelenswillapply[REF.LENSMEMORY]adjustedvalues.Alternatively,ifnoadjustedvalueshavebeenstoredto[REF.LENSMEMORY],theunitwillreturntothedefaultfactoryset-tings.

FORCEDMUTE

OFF Notturnofftheimageduringlesshift.

ON Turnofftheimageduringlesshift.

•SHUTTERSETTINGS

POWERONSHUTTER

OPEN Whenthepoweristurnedon,thelightsourceturnsonandthepictureisprojected.

CLOSE Whenthepoweristurnedon,thelightsourcedoesnotturnon.

PICTUREMUTESHUT-TER

OPEN Thelightsourceremainstoonwhenthepictureisturnedoffforswitchingtheinputterminals.

CLOSE Thelightsourceturnsoffwhenthepictureisturnedoffforswitchingtheinputtermi-nals.

FADEINTIME SethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeinafterpressingtheSHUTTERbutton.

FADEOUTTIME SethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeoutafterpressingtheSHUTTTERbutton.

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

Page 77: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

60

3. Convenient Features

⓬ Storing Changes for Lens Shift, Zoom, and Focus [LENS MEMORY]TheadjustedvaluescanbestoredinprojectormemorywhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift, focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.Therearetwowaystosaveadjustedvaluesfor lensshift,zoom,andfocus.

Functionname Description page

REF.LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluescommontoallinputsignals.Atthetimeofinstallation,twokindsofadjustedvaluescanbestored.Ifnoadjustedvaluesarestoredin[LENSMEMORY],adjustedvaluesfromtheselectedprofile([REF.LENSMEMORY])willbeappliedforlens adjustment.

→page120

LENSMEMORY Adjustedvaluesforeachinputsignal.Usetheadjustedvaluesforthesignalwithadifferentaspectratioorresolution.Theadjustedvaluescanbeappliedatthetimeofsourceselection.

→page103

NOTE:• ForusingthelensunitNP16FL,NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZL,andNP31ZL,besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRA-TION]afterreplacingthelensunit.(→ page 18, 120)

• Forthelensunit,NP16FL,thestorablevalueas[LENSMEMORY]featureisfor[FOCUS]only.• The[LENSMEMORY]featureisnotavailableforthelensunit,NP39ML.

Page 78: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

61

3. Convenient Features

To store your adjusted values in [REF. LENS MEMORY]:1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION(2)].

4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[REF.LENSMEMORY]screenwillbedisplayed.

5.Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Page 79: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

62

3. Convenient Features

The[PROFILE]selectionscreenappears.

6. Press the ▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Returntothe[REF.LENSMEMORY]settingsscreen.

7. Select[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Selecta[PROFILE]numberandsavetheadjusted[LENSSHIFT],[ZOOM],and[FOCUS]valuestoit.

• The[FORCEDMUTE]settingstopsprojectionduringlensshift.(→page120)

9. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbeclosed.

TIP:• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 103)

Page 80: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

63

3. Convenient Features

To call up your adjusted values from [REF. LENS MEMORY]:1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▶buttontoselect[SETUP]andpresstheENTERbutton.3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION(2)].4. Press the ▼buttontoselect[REF.LENSMEMORY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[REF.LENSMEMORY]screenwillbedisplayed.

5.Makesure[PROFILE]ishighlighted,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROFILE]selectionscreenappears.

6. Press the ▼/▲buttonstoselectthe[PROFILE]number,thenpresstheENTERbutton.

Returntothe[REF.LENSMEMORY]settingsscreen.

7. Select[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Page 81: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

64

3. Convenient Features

Thelenswillshiftbasedontheadjustedvaluesstoredintheselected[PROFILE].

8. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theadjustedvalueswillbeappliedtothecurrentsignal..

9. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbeclosed.

Page 82: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

65

3. Convenient Features

TIP:Tocallupthestoredvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton. Duringprojection,iftheadjustedvaluesforaninputsignalhavebeensaved,thelenswillshift.Ifnot,thelenswill

shiftaccordingtotheadjustedvaluesstoredintheselected[REF.LENSMEMORY][PROFILE]number.

Toautomaticallyapplythestoredvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton. Thiswillmovethelensautomaticallytothepositionatthetimeofsourceselectionaccordingtotheadjusted

values.

NOTE:TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjustedvaluesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingthestoredvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,finelyadjustthelensshift,zoomandfocustoproducethebestpossibleimage.

Page 83: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

66

4. Multi-Screen Projection❶ Things that can be done using multi-screen projectionThisprojectorcanbeusedsinglyorarrangedinmultipleunitsformulti-screenprojection.Wewillintroduceanexampleusingtwoprojectionscreenshere.

Case 1Usingasingleprojectortoprojecttwotypesofvideosatthesametime[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]

Case 2Usingfourprojectors(resolution:WUXGA)toprojectvideowitharesolutionof2560×1600pixels[TILING]

Case 1. Using a single projector to project two types of videos [PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

Connection example and projection image

Inthecaseof[PICTUREBYPICTURE] Inthecaseof[PIP]

On-screen menu operationsDisplay[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE].Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”.(→page70)

Page 84: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

67

Case 2. Using four projectors (resolution: WUXGA) to project videos with a resolution of 2560 × 1600 pixels [TILING]

Connection example and projection image

On-screen menu operations1 Foursimilarvideosaredisplayedwhenfourprojectorsareprojected.

Pleaserequestthedealertoadjusttheprojectionpositionofeachprojector.

Page 85: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

68

2 Operatetheon-screenmenuusingthefourrespectiveprojectorstodividetheimageintofourportions.

Display[DISPLAY]→[MULTISCREEN]→[PICTURESETTING]Screenintheon-screenmenuandselect[TIL-ING].

(1)Inthescreenforsettingthenumberofhorizontalunits,select[2UNITS].(numberofunitsinthehorizontaldirection)

(2)Inthescreenforsettingthenumberofverticalunits,select[2UNITS].(numberofunitsintheverticaldirection)

(3)Inthescreenforsettingthehorizontalorder,select[1stUNIT]or[2ndUNIT].

(lookatthescreens,theoneontheleftisthe[1stUNIT]whiletheoneontherightisthe[2ndUNIT])

(4)Inthescreenforsettingtheverticalorder,selectthe[1stUNIT]orthe[2ndUNIT].

(lookatthescreens,theoneatthetopisthe[1stUNIT]whiletheoneatthebottomisthe[2ndUNIT])

3 Adjustthelensshiftofeachprojectortofine-tunetheboundariesofthescreen.

Forfurtherfine-tuning,adjustusing[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]intheon-screenmenuforeachprojector.

Fordetails,pleasereferto“4-3DisplayingaPictureUsing[EDGEBLENDING]”.

(→page74)

Page 86: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

69

Things to note when installing projectors• Leave30cmoroverspacebetweeneachprojectorsandbetweentheintakeventandthewallforinstallingprojec-torssidebyside,sothatairintakeoftheprojectorsarenotobstructed.Whentheairintakeanddischargeoutletareobstructed,thetemperatureinsidetheprojectorwillriseandthismayresultinamalfunction.

30cmorgreater

• Twoprojectorscanbestackedontopofeachother(STACKsetting).(→page157)Donotattempttodirectlystackthreeormoreprojectors.Whentheprojectorsarepiledupontopofoneanother,theymayfalldown,resultingindamageandfailure.

• Installationexamplewhenusing3ormoreprojectors Thefollowinginstallationisrecommendedwheninstallingacombinationof3ormoreprojectorsformulti-screen

projection.[Installationexample]

ExhaustventIntakevent Cabinet

Airexhaust

Airintake

Back Back

WARNING

Pleaserequestthedealerforspecialinstallationservicessuchaswhenmountingtheprojectortotheceiling.Nevercarryouttheinstallationbyyourself.Theprojectormayfalldownandresultininjury.Pleaseuseasturdycabinetthatcanwithstandtheweightoftheprojectorfortheinstallation.Pleasedonotpileuptheprojectorsdirectlyontop of one another.

NOTE:• Fortherangeoftheprojectiondistance,pleaserefertotheAppendix“Throwdistanceandscreensize”.(→ page 161)

Page 87: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

70

❷ Displaying Two Pictures at the Same TimeTheprojectorhasafeaturethatallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.Youhavetwomodes:pictureinpicture(PIP)modeandpicturebypicture(PICTUREBYPICTURE)mode.Theprojectionvideointhefirstscreendisplayisknownasthemaindisplaywhiletheprojectionvideothatiscalledoutsubsequentlyisknownasthesub-display.Selecttheprojectionfunctionunder[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]→[MODE]intheon-screenmenu(thedefaultfactorysettingwhenshippedisPIP).(→page105)• Asinglescreenisprojectedwhenpoweristurnedon.

PictureinPicturefunction(PIP)Asmallsub-displayisdisplayedinsidethemaindisplay.

Thesub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→page105)• Selectwhethertodisplaythesub-displayatthetopright,topleft,bottomrightorbottomleftofthescreen(thesizeofthesub-displaycanbeselectedandthepositioncanbefine-tuned)

• Switchthemaindisplaywiththesub-display

Main Display

Sub-Display

Picturebypicturefunction(PICTUREBYPICTURE)Displaythemaindisplayandsub-displaysidebyside.

Themaindisplayandsub-displaycanbesetupandadjustedasfollows.(→ page105)• Selectingthedisplayboundary(ratio)ofthemaindisplayandsub-display• Switchthemaindisplayandsub-display

Main Display Sub-Display

Input terminals that can be used for the main screen and sub-screen.Themainscreenandsub-screencanprovidethefollowinginputterminals.• Themaindisplayandsub-displaysupportcomputersignalsuptoWUXGA@60HzRB.

Sub-Display or additional displayHDMI DisplayPort BNC BNC(CV) BNC(Y/C) COMPUTER HDBaseT SLOT

Main Display

HDMI No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NoDisplayPort Yes Yes Yes YesBNC Yes Yes

NoNo Yes Yes

BNC(CV) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesBNC(Y/C) Yes Yes Yes Yes YesCOMPUTER Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes YesHDBaseT No Yes Yes Yes Yes No NoSLOT No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

NOTE:• Somesignalsmaynotappeardependingontheresolution.• WhileutilizingPIPorPBPfunction,theHDMI-OUTterminalontheprojectoroutputsthesignalforthesub-display.

Page 88: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

71

Projecting two screens1.PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Thisdisplaysthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]screenintheon-screenmenu.

2. Select[SUBINPUT]usingthe▼/▲ buttons, and press the ENTER button.

Thisdisplaysthe[SUBINPUT]screen.

3. Select the input signal using the ▼/▲ buttons, and press the ENTER button.

The[PIP](PICTUREINPICTURE)or[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screensetupunder[MODE]isprojected.(→ page105)

• Whenthesignalnameisdisplayedingrey,thismeansthatitcannotbeselected.

• ThesignalcanalsobeselectedbypressingthePIP/FREEZEbuttonontheremotecontrol.

4. Press the MENU button.

Theon-screenmenuwilldisappear.

5.Whenreturningtosinglescreen,displaythe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTUE]screenonemoretimeandselect[OFF]inthe[SUBINPUT]screenoftheStep3.

TIP:• Duringdual-screenprojection,iftheselectedinputisnotsupportedbythesub-screen,thesub-screenwillappearasablack

screen.

Page 89: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

72

Switching the main display with the sub-display and vice versa1.PresstheMENUbuttontodisplaytheon-screenmenuandselect[DISPLAY]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

Thisdisplaysthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]screenintheon-screenmenu.

2. Select[PICTURESWAP]usingthe▼/▲ buttons and then press the ENTER button.

Displaythescreenforswitchingthedisplaypositions.

3. Select[ON]usingthe▼ button and then press the ENTER button.

Thevideoofthemaindisplaywillswitchwiththatofthesub-display.

Whenturned“OFF” Whenturned“ON”

Sub-displayvideo

Maindisplayvideo Sub-displayvideo

Maindisplayvideo

ThesignaloutputfromtheHDMIOUTterminaldoesnotchangeevenifthedisplaypositionsareswitched.

4. Press the menu button.

Theon-screenmenuwilldisappear.

Page 90: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

73

Restrictions

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledonlyforthemaindisplay.

• Visualadjustments

• Videomagnification/demaginificationusingthepartialD-ZOOM/ZOOM+/−buttons.

However,magnification/demaginificationisuptotheboundarysetin[PICTUREBYPICTURE].

• TESTPATTERN

• Thefollowingoperationsareenabledforboththemaindisplayandsub-display.Theseoperationscannotbeap-plied individually.

• Momentarydeletionofvideo

• Videopause

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhena3Dvideoisbeingdisplayed.

• Whenusingthe[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]function,[CLOSEDCAPTION]and[DYNAMICCONTRAST]canbe used.

• [PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]cannotbeusedwhenthesignalinputhasaresolutionof1920×1200ormore.

• TheHDMIOUTterminalhasarepeaterfunction.Theoutputresolutionislimitedbythemaximumresolutionoftheconnected monitor and projector.

Page 91: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

74

❸ Displaying a Picture Using [EDGE BLENDING]Ahighresolutionvideocanbeprojectedonanevenbiggerscreenbycombiningmultipleprojectorsontheleft,right,top and bottom.Thisprojectorisequippedwithan“EDGEBLENDINGFunction”thatmakestheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenindistinguishable.

NOTE:• Forprojectorthrowdistances,referto“Throwdistanceandscreensize”onpage161.• BeforeperformingtheEdgeBlendingfunction,placetheprojectorinthecorrectpositionsothattheimagebecomessquareintheappropriatesize,andthenmakeopticaladjustments(lensshift,focus,andzoom).

• Adjustthebrightnessofeachprojectorusing[REF.LIGHTADJUST]under[LIGHTMODE].Afteradjustingthebrightness,youcankeepthesetbrightnesslevelbyturningONthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode.Inaddition,use[REF.WHITEBALANCE]toadjustthe[CONTRAST]and[BRIGHTNESS].

BeforeexplaininguseoftheEdgeBlendingfunctionThissectionexplainsthecasefor“Example:Placingtwoprojectorssidebyside”.Asshown,theprojectedimageontheleftisreferredtoas“ProjectorA”andtheprojectedimageontherightisreferredto“ProjectorB”.Unlessotherwisespecifiedhereinafter,the“projector”isusedtomeanbothAandB.

Example: Placing two projectors side by side

EdgeBlendingarea

Projectedarea Projectedarea

ProjectorA ProjectorB

Page 92: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

75

Preparation:• Turnontheprojectoranddisplayasignal.• Inordertouseoneremotecontrolforperformingsettingsandadjustmentstosomeprojectors,set[ENABLE]fortheCONTROLIDandassignIDforeachprojector,andthenperformsettingsandadjustmentstoeach.

Setting the overlap of projection screens

①Enable[EDGEBLENDING].1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Select[EDGEBLENDING].

The[EDGEBLENDING]screenwillbedisplayed.Alignthecursorwith[MODE]andthenpresstheENTERbut-ton.Themodescreenwillbedisplayed.

3. Select[MODE]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThisenablestheEdgeBlendingfunction.Thefollowingmenuitemsareavailable:

[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT],[RIGHT],[BLACKLEVEL],and[BLENDCURVE]

4. Select[RIGHT]forProjectorAand[LEFT]forProjectorB.

PresstheENTERbutton.

Thefollowingitemsareavailable:

[CONTROL],[MARKER],[RANGE],and[POSITION]

Page 93: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

76

5. Select[CONTROL]→[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Each[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT],[RIGHT],and[BLACKLEVEL]hasitsown[CONTROL],[MARKER],[RANGE],and[POSITION].

• ForProjectorA,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[LEFT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].SimilarlyforProjectorB,setthe[CONTROL]forthe[TOP],[RIGHT]and[BOTTOM]to[OFF].

②Adjust[RANGE]and[POSITION]todetermineanareaofoverlappededgesofimagesprojected from each projector.Turningon[MARKER]willdisplaymarkersinmagentaandgreen.Themagentamarkerisusedfor[RANGE]andgreenonefor[POSITION].

[RANGE](Determineanareaofoverlappededgesofimages.)

[POSITION](Determinethepositionofoverlappededgesofimages.)Greenmarker

Turnon[RIGHT]

Magentamarker

Turnon[LEFT]

Magentamarker

* The2screensareseparatedinthediagramforexplanatorypurposes.

Page 94: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

77

1 Adjust[RANGE].

Usethe◀or▶buttontoadjusttheoverlappedarea.

TIP:• Adjusttooverlaponeprojector’markerwiththeotherprojector’smarker.

2 Adjust[POSITION].

Usethe◀or▶buttontoalignoneedgewiththeotheredgeofoverlappedimages.

TIP:• Whendisplayingasignalwithadifferentresolution,performtheEdgeBlendingfunctionfromthestart.• Settingof[MARKER]willnotbesavedandreturnto[OFF]whentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Todisplayorhidethemarkerwhiletheprojectorisrunning,turnonoroff[MARKER]fromthemenu.

BLEND CURVEAdjustthebrightnessoftheoverlappedsectiononthescreens.Accordingtothenecessity,adjustthebrightnessoftheoverlappedsectiononthescreensbythe[BLENDCURVE]AND[BLACKLEVEL].• Setthe[MODE]to[ON]forselecting[BLENDCURVE]and[BLACKLEVEL].

Selectinganoptionforthe[BLENDCURVE]Bycontrollingthegraduationoftheoverlappedsectiononthescreens,itmakestheborderontheprojectedscreensinconspicuous.Selecttheoptimaloptionamongnine.1.OntheOn-ScreenMenu,movethecursorontothe[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]→[BLENDCURVE]and

thenpresstheENTER.Theoptionsettingscreenforthe[BRENDCURVE]isdisplayedon.

2. Select one option among nine by ▲ or ▼.

Page 95: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

78

Black Level AdjustmentThisadjuststheblackleveloftheoverlappingareaandthenon-overlappingareaofthemulti-screen(EDGEBLENDING).Adjustthebrightnesslevelifyoufeelthedifferenceistoolarge.

NOTE: Thisfunctionisenabledonlywhen[MODE]isturnedon.Adjustableareavariesdependingonwhatcombinationof[TOP],[BOTTOM],[LEFT]and[RIGHT]areturnedon.

Example:AdjustingtheBlackLevelwhenplacingtwoprojectorssidebyside

Widthofoverlap

Adjust[CENTER] Adjust[CENTER]

ProjectorA’simage

ProjectorB’simage

Adjust[CENTER-RIGHT] Adjust[CENTER-LEFT]

1. Select[DISPLAY]→[EDGEBLENDING]→[BLACKLEVEL]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thescreenwillswitchtotheblackleveladjustmentscreen.

2. Use the ▼ or ▲ button to select an item and use the ◀ or ▶ to adjust the black level.

Dothisfortheotherprojectorifnecessary.

Page 96: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

4. Multi-Screen Projection

79

9-segmentedportionsforBlackLeveladjustmentThecenterprojector

Thisfunctionadjuststhebrightnesslevelof9-segmentedportionsforthecenterprojectorand4-segmentedportionsfor the left bottom projector as shown below.

TOP-LEFT

BOTTOM-LEFT

CENTER-LEFT

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

BOTTOM-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

CENTER

CENTER

BOTTOM-CENTER

TOP-RIGHT

CENTER-RIGHT

TOP-CENTER

TIP:• Thenumberofblackleveldivisionscreens(maximumofninedivisions)changesdependingonthenumberofedgeblendingpositionsselected(top,bottom,right,left).Inaddition,whenthetop/bottomandleft/rightendsareselected,thecornerdivisionscreen appears.

• Theedgeblendingwidthisthewidthsetintherangeandthecornerisformedbytheintersectingareaofthetop/bottomendsorleft/rightends.

• The[BLACKLEVEL]canbeadjustedtomakeitbrighteronly.

Page 97: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

80

5. Using On-Screen Menu❶ Using the Menus

NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly depending on input signal and the projector setting.

1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.

NOTE: The commands such as ENTER,EXIT,▲▼, ◀▶inthebottomshowavailablebuttonsforyouroperation.

2. Press the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu.

3.PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemorthefirsttab.

4. Use the ▲▼ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or set.

You can use the ◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want.

5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window.

6.Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthe▲▼◀▶ buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet.

Changesarestoreduntiladjustedagain.

7. Repeat steps 2-6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to quit the menu display.

NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.

8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.

To return to the previous menu, press the EXIT button.

Page 98: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

81

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❷ Menu ElementsSlidebar

Solidtriangle

Menumode

Tab

Radiobutton

LIGHTMODEsymbol

HIGHsymbol

Menuwindowsordialogboxestypicallyhavethefollowingelements:

Highlight ����������������������������� Indicates the selected menu or item� Solid triangle ���������������������� Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active� Tab �������������������������������������� Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�Radio button �����������������������Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�Source �������������������������������� Indicates the currently selected source�Menu mode ������������������������ Indicates the current menu mode: BASIC or ADVANCED�Off Timer remaining time ���� Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�Slide bar ����������������������������� Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�LIGHT MODE symbol ���������� Indicates [LIGHT MODE] is set�Key Lock symbol ���������������� Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�Thermometer symbol ��������� Indicates the [LIGHT MODE] is forcibly set to [ECO] mode�High symbol ����������������������� Indicates the built-in atmospheric pressure sensor detects height over 1200 m�

Source

Availablebuttons

Thermometersymbol

KeyLocksymbol

OffTimerremainingtime

Highlight

Page 99: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

82

5. Using On-Screen Menu

* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*3 When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],the[COLORTEMPERATURE]isnotavailable.*4 The[INPUTRESOLLUTION]itemisavailablewheneitherCOMPUTERorBNCsignalisselectedastheinputterminal.

•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.❸ List of Menu ItemsSomemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.Menu Item Default Options

INPUT

HDMI *DisplayPort *BNC *BNC(CV) *BNC(Y/C) *COMPUTER *HDBaseTSLOTENTRY LISTTEST PATTERN

ADJUST

PICTURE

MODE STANDARD STANDARD, PROFESSIONAL

PRESET * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM�, EDGE BLENDING

DETAIL SETTINGS

GENERAL

REFERENCE * HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB, DICOM SIM�, EDGE BLENDING

GAMMA CORRECTION*1

SELECT DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAILREFERENCE

SCREEN SIZE*2 * LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALLCOLOR TEMPERATURE*3 *DYNAMIC CONTRAST * OFF, ONLIGHT ADJUSTBrilliant Color * OFF, MEDIUM, HIGH

WHITE BALANCECONTRAST R 0CONTRAST G 0CONTRAST B 0BRIGHTNESS R 0BRIGHTNESS G 0BRIGHTNESS B 0

COLOR CORRECTION

REDHUE

0SATURATION

GREENHUE

0SATURATION

BLUEHUE

0SATURATION

YELLOWHUE

0SATURATION

MAGENTAHUE

0SATURATION

CYANHUE

0SATURATION

CONTRAST 0BRIGHTNESS 0SHARPNESS 0COLOR 0HUE 0RESET

IMAGE OPTIONS

CLOCK *PHASE *HORIZONTAL *VERTICAL *BLANKING * TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHTOVERSCAN AUTO AUTO, 0[%], 5[%], 10[%]

ASPECT RATIO

AUTO (COMPUTER) AUTO, 4:3, 5:4, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, FULL, NATIVE

AUTO (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO) (SCREEN TYPE: 4:3) AUTO, 4:3, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, ZOOM

AUTO (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO) (SCREEN TYPE: 16:9/16:10) AUTO, 4:3 WINDOW, LETTERBOX, WIDE SCREEN, FULL

INPUT RESOLUTION*4 * –

Page 100: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

83

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

ADJUST

VIDEO

NOISE REDUCTIONRANDOM NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHMOSQUITO NR OFF OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGHBLOCK NR OFF OFF, LOW

DEINTERLACE NORMAL NORMAL, MOVIE, STILLCONTRAST ENHANCEMENT

MODE AUTO OFF, AUTO, NORMALGAIN

SIGNAL TYPE AUTO AUTO, RGB, COMPONENTVIDEO LEVEL AUTO AUTO, NORMAL, ENHANCED, SUPER WHITE

3D SETTINGSFORMAT AUTO

AUTO, OFF(2D), FRAME PACKING, SIDE BY SIDE(HALF), SIDE BY SIDE(FULL), TOP AND BOTTOM, FRAME ALTERNATIVE, LINE ALTERNATIVE

L/R INVERT OFF OFF, ON

LENS MEMORY

STOREMOVERESET

DISPLAY

PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE

SUB INPUT OFF, HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

MODE PIP PIP, PICTURE BY PICTUREPICTURE SWAP OFF OFF, ON

PIP SETTING

START POSITION TOP-LEFT TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-RIGHTHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITIONSIZE MEDIUM LARGE, MEDIUM, SMALL

BORDER

GEOMETRIC CORRECTION

MODE OFF, KEYSTONE, CORNERSTONE, HORIZONTAL CORNER, VERTICAL CORNER, WARP, PC TOOL

KEYSTONE

HORIZONTALVERTICALTILTTHROW RATIO

CORNERSTONE TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

HORIZONTAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

VERTICAL CORNER TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

WARP TOP-LEFT, TOP, TOP-RIGHT, LEFT, RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM, BOTTOM-RIGHT

PC TOOL OFF OFF, 1, 2, 3RESET

EDGE BLENDING

MODE OFF OFF, ON

TOP

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

BOTTOM

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

LEFT

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

RIGHT

CONTROL ON OFF, ONMARKER ON OFF, ONRANGEPOSITION

BLACK LEVEL

TOP-LEFTTOP-CENTERTOP-RIGHTCENTER-LEFTCENTERCENTER-RIGHTBOTTOM-LEFTBOTTOM-CENTERBOTTOM-RIGHT

BLEND CURVE OFF OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

Page 101: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

84

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

DISPLAY MULTI SCREEN

WHITE BALANCE

MODE OFF OFF, ONCONTRAST WCONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS WBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS B

PICTURE SETTING

MODE OFF OFF, ZOOM, TILING

ZOOM

HORIZONTAL ZOOMVERTICAL ZOOMHORIZONTAL POSITIONVERTICAL POSITION

TILING

WIDTH 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHEIGHT 1 UNIT, 2 UNITS, 3 UNITS, 4 UNITSHORIZONTAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT

VERTICAL POSITION 1st UNIT, 2nd UNIT, 3rd UNIT, 4th UNIT

SETUP

MENU(1)

LANGUAGE ENGLISH

ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO, ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA, 日本語DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI, NEDERLANDS, SUOMINORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ, , Ελληνικά, 中文, 한국어ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, हिन्दी, ไทย,

, 繁體中文, Tiếng ViệtCOLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROMEINPUT DISPLAY ON OFF, ONMESSAGE DISPLAY ON OFF, ONID DISPLAY ON OFF, ON3D CAUTION MESSAGE ON OFF, ON

DISPLAY TIME AUTO 45 SEC MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC

MENU(2)

MENU ANGLE 0° 0°, 90°, 270°

MENU POSITIONHORIZONTAL POSITION 0 -10–10VERTICAL POSITION 0 -10–10RESET

INSTALLA-TION(1)

ORIENTATION AUTO AUTO, DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR, CEILING FRONT

SCREEN TYPE FREE FREE, 4:3 SCREEN, 16:9 SCREEN, 16:10 SCREEN

WALL COLOR OFF OFF, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD (GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK

FAN MODE AUTO AUTO, MIDDLE, HIGH

LIGHT MODELIGHT MODE NORMAL NORMAL, ECO1, ECO2CONSTANT BRIGHTNESS OFF OFF, ONREF� LIGHT ADJUST 20–100%

REF� WHITE BALANCE

CONTRAST RCONTRAST GCONTRAST BBRIGHTNESS RBRIGHTNESS GBRIGHTNESS B

3D GLASSES OTHERS DLP® Link, OTHERS

INSTALLA-TION(2)

SHUTTER SETTINGS

POWER ON SHUTTER OPEN OPEN, CLOSEPICTURE MUTE SHUTTER OPEN OPEN, CLOSEFADE IN TIME 0–10 sec�FADE OUT TIME 0–10 sec�

REF� LENS MEMORY

PROFILE 1 1, 2STOREMOVERESETLOAD BY SIGNAL OFF ON, OFFFORCED MUTE OFF ON, OFF

LENS CALIBRATION

LENS POSITIONHOMETYPE NP39ML

Page 102: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

85

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP CONTROL

TOOLS

ADMINISTRA-TOR MODE

MENU MODE ADVANCED ADVANCED, BASICNOT SAVE SETTING VALUES OFF OFF, ONNEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

PROGRAM TIMER

ENABLE OFF OFF, ON

SETTINGS

EDIT

ACTIVE OFF, ON

DAY SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT, MON-FRI, MON-SAT, EVERY DAY

TIMEFUNCTION POWER, INPUT, LIGHT MODEADVANCED SETTINGSPOWER OFF OFF, ON

INPUT HDMI HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

LIGHT MODE NORMAL NORMAL, ECO1, ECO2REPEAT OFF OFF, ON

DELETEUPDOWNBACK

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

TIME ZONE SETTIMGS

GMT

-12:00, -11:30, -11:00, -10:30, -10:00, -09:30, -09:00, -08:30, -08:00, -07:30, -07:00, -06:30, -06:00, -05:30, -05:00, -04:30, -04:00, -03:30, -03:00, -02:30, -02:00, -01:30, -01:00, -00:30, 00:00, +00:30, +01:00, +01:30, +02:00, +02:30, +03:00, +03:30, +04:00, +04;30, +05:00, +05:30, +06:00, +06:30, +07:00, +07:30, +08:00, +08:30, +09:00, +09:30, +10:00, +10:30, +11:00, +11:30, +12:00, +12:30, +13:00

DATE AND TIME SETTINGS

DATE MM/DD/YYYYTIME HH:MMINTERNET TIME SERVER OFF OFF, ON

IP ADDRESSUPDATE

SUMMER TIME SETTINGS

ENABLE OFF OFF, ONMON(START) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(START)FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH, LASTSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(START)MON(EXIT) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

DAY(EXIT)FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK, FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEKSUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT

TIME(EXIT)TIME DIFFERENCE +01:00, +00:30, -00:30, -01:00

MOUSE (Note) Cannot be used for this device�CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ONSECURITY OFF OFF, ONCOMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps

CONTROL IDCONTROL ID NUMBER 1 1–254CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON

REMOTE SENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK, FRONT, BACK, HDBase-T

Page 103: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

86

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

SETUP

NETWORK SETTINGS

WIRED LAN

PROFILES DISABLE, PROFILE 1, PROFILE 2DHCP OFF, ONIP ADDRESS 192�168�0�10SUBNET MASK 255�255�255�0GATEWAY 192�168�0�1AUTO DNS OFF, ONDNS CONFIGURATIONRECONNECT

PROJECTOR NAME PROJECTOR NAME PX1004UL Series

DOMAINHOST NAME necpjDOMAIN NAME

ALERT MAIL

ALERT MAIL OFF, ONHOST NAMEDOMAIN NAMESENDER'S ADDRESSSMTP SERVER NAMERECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 1RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 2RECIPIENT'S ADDRESS 3TEST MAIL

NETWORK SERVICE

HTTP SERVER

NEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

PJLinkNEW PASSWORDCONFIRM PASSWORD

AMX BEACON OFF, ON

CRESTRON

ROOMVIEW OFF, ONCRESTRON CONTROL (ENABLE, CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS, IP ID)

Extron XTP OFF, ON

SOURCE OPTIONS

AUTO ADJUST NORMAL OFF, NORMAL, FINE

COLOR SYSTEMBNC(VIDEO) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3�58, NTSC4�43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAMBNC(Y/C) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3�58, NTSC4�43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM

DEFAULT INPUT SELECT LAST LAST, AUTO, HDMI, DisplayPort, BNC, BNC(CV), BNC(Y/C), COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT

CLOSED CAPTION OFF OFF, CAPTION1, CAPTION2, CAPTION3, CAPTION4, TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4

BACKGROUND BLUE BLUE, BLACK, LOGO

POWER OPTIONS

STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, NETWORK STANDBYDIRECT POWER ON OFF OFF, ONAUTO POWER ON SELECT OFF OFF, HDMI, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOTAUTO POWER OFF 1:00 OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:15, 0:20, 0:30, 1:00OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00

SLOT POWERPROJECTOR ON ON OFF, ONPROJECTOR STANDBY ENABLE DISABLE, ENABLE

RESETCURRENT SIGNALALL DATAALL DATA (INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)

Page 104: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

87

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu Item Default Options

INFO�

USAGE TIMELIGHT HOURS USEDTOTAL CARBON SAVINGS

SOURCE(1)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO�

SOURCE(2)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE3D FORMAT

SOURCE(3)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO�

SOURCE(4)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE3D FORMAT

WIRED LAN

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAYMAC ADDRESS

VERSION(1)FIRMWAREDATASUB-CPU

OTHERS

DATE TIMEPROJECTOR NAMEMODEL NO�SERIAL NUMBERCONTROL ID (when [CONTROL ID] is set)

HDBaseT

SIGNAL QUALITYOPERATION MODELINK STATUSHDMI STATUS

Page 105: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

88

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❹ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INPUT]

HDMIThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheHDMIINterminal.

DisplayPortThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal.

BNCThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNCINvideoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

BNC(CV)ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNC(CV)videoinputterminal.(Thisprojectsthecompositevideosignal.)

BNC(Y/C)ThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheBNC(Y/C)videoinputterminal.(ThisprojectstheS-videosignal.)

COMPUTERThisprojectsthevideoofthedeviceconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINterminal.(ThisprojectstheanalogRGBsignalorcomponentsignal.)

HDBaseTProjectingtheHDBaseTorWIREDLANsignal.

SLOTProjectsthepictureviatheoptionalboard(soldseparately)insertedintotheSLOT.

ENTRY LISTDisplaysalistofsignals.Seethefollowingpages.

TEST PATTERNClosesthemenuandswitchestothetestpatternscreen.Selectthepatternusingthe◀▶ buttons.

Page 106: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

89

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Entry ListWhenanysourceadjustmentsaremade,theadjustmentsareautomaticallyregisteredintheEntryList.The(adjust-mentvaluesof)registeredsignalscanbeloadedfromtheEntryListwhenevernecessary.Upto100patternscanberegisteredintheEntryList.When100patternshavebeenregisteredintheEntryList,anerrormessageisthendisplayedandnoadditionalpatternscanberegistered.Youshouldthusdelete(adjustmentvaluesof)signalsthatarenolongerneeded.

Displaying the Entry list1. Press the MENU button.

Themenuwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[INPUT]. TheINPUTlistwillbedisplayed.

3. Use the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼toselect[ENTRYLIST]andpresstheENTERbutton. TheENTRYLISTwindowswillbedisplayed.

IftheENTRYLISTwindowisnotdisplayed,switchthemenuto[ADVANCED].

Toswitchthemenubetween[ADVANCED]and[BASIC],select[SETUP]→[CONTROL]→[TOOLS]→[AD-MINISTRATORMODE]→[MENUMODE].(→page121)

Page 107: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

90

5. Using On-Screen Menu

EnteringthecurrentlyprojectedsignalintotheEntryList[ (STORE)]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select any number.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[ (STORE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

CallingupasignalfromtheEntryList[ (LOAD)]Press the ▲ or ▼buttontoselectasignalandpresstheENTERbutton.

EditingasignalfromtheEntryList[ (EDIT)]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to edit.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (EDIT)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

TheEditwindowwillbedisplayed.

SOURCENAME Enterasignalname.Upto18alphanumericcharacterscanbeused.INPUT Theinputterminalcanbechanged.SwitchingbetweenHDMI/DisplayPort/BNC/BNC(CV)/

BNC(Y/C)/Computer/HDBaseT/SLOTispossible.LOCK Setsothattheselectedsignalcannotbedeletedwhen[ (ALLDELETE)]isexecuted.

ThechangesmadeafterLOCKexecutioncannotbesaved.SKIP Setsothattheselectedsignalwillbeskippedduringautosearch.

3. Settheaboveitemsandselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The input terminal cannot be changed to the currently projected signal.

Page 108: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

91

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CuttingasignalfromtheEntryList[ (CUT)]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to delete.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (CUT)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThesignalwillbedeletedfromtheEntryListandthedeletedsignalwillbedisplayedontheclipboardatthebot-tomoftheEntryList.

NOTE:• Thecurrentlyprojectedsignalcannotbedeleted.• Whenthelockedsignalisselected,itwillbedisplayedingraywhichindicatesitisnotavailable.

TIP:• DataontheclipboardcanbepassedontotheEntryList.• DataontheclipboardwillnotbelostaftertheEntryListisclosed.

CopyingandpastingasignalfromtheEntryList[ (COPY)]/[ (PASTE)]

1. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal you wish to copy.

2. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (COPY)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThecopiedsignalwillbedisplayedontheclipboardatthebottomoftheEntryList.

3. Press the ◀ or ▶ button to move to the list.

4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a signal.

5. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (PASTE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Dataontheclipboardwillbepastedtothesignal.

DeletingallthesignalsfromtheEntryList[ (ALLDELTE)]

1. Press the ◀, ▶, ▲, or ▼buttontoselect[ (ALLDELETE)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationmessagewillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: The locked signal cannot be deleted.

Page 109: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

92

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❺ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST][PICTURE]

[MODE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutodeterminehowtosavesettingsfor[DETAILSETTINGS]of[PRESET]foreachinput.

STANDARD ������������ Saves settings for each item of [PRESET] (Preset 1 through 8)PROFESSIONAL ����� Saves all the settings of [PICTURE] for each input�

NOTE: • When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[MODE]cannotbeselected.

[PRESET]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.Thereareeightfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]tosetuseradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET8].

HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�sRGB ��������������������� Standard color valuesDICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�EDGE BLENDING ��� Recommended for edge blending�

NOTE: • The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA).

Thestandardspecifieshowdigitalimagedatacanbemovedfromsystemtosystem.• Adjustmentmaynotworkdependingoninputsignal.

Page 110: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

93

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[DETAILSETTINGS]

[GENERAL]StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET8].First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERA-TURE].

HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values�DICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�EDGE BLENDING ��� Recommended for edge blending�

SelectingGammaCorrectionMode[GAMMACORRECTION]Eachmodein[SELECT]correctscolortoneofprojectedimageandisrecommendedfor:

DYNAMIC �������������� Creates a high-contrast picture�NATURAL ��������������� Natural reproduction of the picture�BLACK DETAIL ������� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�

In[REFERENCE],itadjustscorrectedvalueforprojectedimage.Highervaluemeansdeepercorrection.

NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

Page 111: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

94

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingScreenSizeforDICOMSIM[SCREENSIZE]Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.

LARGE ������������������� For screen size of 150"MEDIUM ���������������� For screen size of 100"SMALL ������������������� For screen size of 50"

NOTE: • Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].• Correctionvalueischangeddependingonprojectionimages.

AdjustingColorTemperature[COLORTEMPERATURE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.Avaluebetween5000Kand10500Kcanbesetina500Kunit.

NOTE: • When[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.• When[PRESENTATION]isselectedin[REFERENCE],theselectablerangefor[COLORTEMPERATURE]is3levels,0,1,and3.

AdjustingBrightnessandContrast[DYNAMICCONTRAST]If[ON]isselected,themostoptimalcontrastratioisusedaccordingtothepicture.

NOTE:• Dependingontheconditions,projectorsettingssuchas[DYNAMICCONTRAST]maynotbeabletobeselected.

AdjustingBrightness[LIGHTADJUST]Brightnesscanbeadjustedin1%incrementsfrom20to100%.Theadjustmentiseffectivewhen[NORMAL]isselectedfor[LIGHTMODE]and[PROFESSIONAL]isselectedfor[MODE].

[BrilliantColor]Selectsthebrightnessofthecolorwhite.Selectingoptionsfrom[MEDIUM]to[HIGH]increasesthebrightnessofthecolorwhite.

NOTE:• Ifunder[REFERENCE],[HIGH-BRIGHT]or[PRESENTATION]areselected,[BrilliantColor]cannotbechanged.

AdjustingWhiteBalance[WHITEBALANCE]Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.

[COLORCORRECTION]Correctsthecolorforallsignals.Adjuststhetoneforthecolorsred,green,blue,yellow,magentaandcyan.

RED HUE +Direction Magentadirection−Direction Yellowdirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

GREEN HUE +Direction Yellowdirection−Direction Cyandirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

BLUE HUE +Direction Cyandirection−Direction Magentadirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

Page 112: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

95

5. Using On-Screen Menu

YELLOW HUE +Direction Reddirection−Direction Greendirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

MAGENTA HUE +Direction Blue direction−Direction Reddirection

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

CYAN HUE +Direction Greendirection−Direction Blue direction

SATURATION +Direction Vivid−Direction Weak

[CONTRAST]Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.

[BRIGHTNESS]Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.

[SHARPNESS]Controlsthedetailoftheimage.

[COLOR]Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.

[HUE]Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.

Inputsignal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUERGBsystemof“COMPUTER/Display-Port/HDMI/HDBaseT”

Yes Yes Yes No No

COMPONENTsystemof“COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI/HDBaseT”

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

CompositeVideo/S-Video Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes=Adjustable,No=Notadjustable

NOTE:• When[TESTPATTERN]isdisplayed,[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[SHARPNESS],[COLOR]and[HUE]cannotbeadjusted.

[RESET]Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorysettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselectedwill not be reset.

Page 113: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

96

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[IMAGE OPTIONS]

AdjustingClockandPhase[CLOCK/PHASE]ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.

CLOCK ������������������� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time�

PHASE ������������������� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�

NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.

Page 114: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

97

5. Using On-Screen Menu

AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.

• Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.

• Theadjustmentsfor[CLOCK],[PHASE],[HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestoredinmemoryforthecur-rentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,itsadjustments will be called up and applied.

Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]andresetthe adjustments.

[BLANKING]Adjuststhedisplayrange(blanking)atthetop,bottom,leftandrightedgesoftheinputsignal.

SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]Selectoverscanpercentage(Auto,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.

Projectedimage

Overscanedby10%

NOTE: • The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable: -when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].

Page 115: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

98

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingtheAspectRatio[ASPECTRATIO]Usethisfunctiontoselectthescreen’slateral:longitudinalaspectratio.Selectthescreentype(4:3screen,16:9screenor16:10screen)inthe[INSTALLATION(1)]beforesettingtheaspectratio.(→page117)Theprojectorautomaticallyidentifiesthesignalbeinginputandsetstheoptimumaspectratio.

For Computer signal

ForComponent/Video/S-Videosignals

Whenthescreentypeissetto4:3 When the screen type is set to 16:9 or 16:10

Resolution AspectRatioVGA 640×480 4:3SVGA 800×600 4:3XGA 1024×768 4:3WXGA 1280×768 15:9WXGA 1280×800 16:10HD(FWXGA) 1366×768 approx.16:9WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10SXGA 1280×1024 5:4SXGA+ 1400×1050 4:3WXGA++ 1600×900 16:9UXGA 1600×1200 4:3WSXGA+ 1680×1050 16:10FHD(1080P) 1920×1080 16:9WUXGA 1920×1200 16:10WQXGA 2560×1600 16:10

Options Function

AUTO Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspectratio.Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthisoccurs,selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.

4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.

5:4 Theimageisdisplayedin5:4aspectratio

16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio

15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio

16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio

Page 116: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

99

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Options Function

NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputersignalhasalowerorhigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.(→page3)Whentheincomingcomputersignalhasahigherresolutionthantheprojector'snativeresolution,thecenterofanimagewillbedisplayed.

LETTERBOX Theimageofaletterboxsignal(16:9)isstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirectionstofitthescreen.

WIDESCREEN Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.

ZOOM Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin4:3.Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenotvisible.

FULL Projecttofullscreensize.

TIP:• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspectratioforavidesource.

Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formoviefilm.• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.

[INPUTRESOLUTION]TheresolutionisassignedautomaticallywhentheresolutionoftheinputsignalfromthecomputervideoinputterminalorBNCvideoinputterminal(analogRGB)cannotbedistinguished.

Page 117: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

100

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[VIDEO]

UsingNoiseReduction[NOISEREDUCTION]Whenprojectingavideoimage,youcanusethe[NOISEREDUCTION]functiontoreducethescreennoise(roughnessanddistortion).Thisdeviceisequippedwiththreetypesofnoisereductionfunctions.Selectthefunctionaccordingtothetypeofnoise.Dependingonthenoiselevel,thenoisereductioneffectcanbesetto[OFF],[LOW],[MEDIUM]or[HIGH].[NOISEREDUCTION]canbeselectedforSDTV,HDTVsignalandcomponentsignalinput.

RANDOM NR ��������� Reduces flickering random noise in an image� MOSQUITO NR ������ Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during Blu-ray playback�BLOCK NR ������������� Reduces block noise or mosaic-like patterns by selecting ON�

SelectingInterlacedProgressiveConversionProcessMode[DEINTERLACE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectaninterlaced-to-progressiveconversionprocessforvideosignals.

NORMAL ���������������� Automatically distinguishes a moving image from a static image to create a distinct image� Please select [MOVIE] if there are any obvious jitter and noises�

MOVIE ������������������� Select when projecting moving images� This is suitable for signals with a lot of jitter and noise�STILL ��������������������� Select when projecting static images� The video will flicker when a moving image is projected�

NOTE:ThisfunctionisnotavailablewithRGBsignals.

[CONTRASTENHANCEMENT]Usingthecharacteristicsofthehumaneye,apicturequalitywithasenseofcontrastandresolutionisachieved.

OFF ������������������������ Contrast enhancement is switched off�AUTO ��������������������� Contrast and picture quality are automatically improved using the suite vision function�NORMAL ���������������� Adjust the gain manually�

Page 118: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

101

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SIGNALTYPE]SelectionofRGBandcomponentsignals.Normally,thisissetto[AUTO].Pleasechangethesettingifthecoloroftheimageremainsunnatural.

AUTO ��������������������� Automatically distinguishes RGB and component signals�RGB ����������������������� Switches to the RGB input�COMPONENT ��������� Switches to the component signal input�

[VIDEOLEVEL]SelectionofthevideosignallevelwhenconnectinganexternaldevicetotheHDMIINterminal,DisplayPortinputterminal,andHDBaseTinputterminaloftheprojector.

AUTO ��������������������� The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal�Depending on the connected device, this setting may not be made properly� In this case, switch to [NORMAL” or “ENHANCED” from the menu and view with the optimum setting�

NORMAL ���������������� This disables the enhanced mode�ENHANCED ������������ This improves the image’s contrast, expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically�SUPER WHITE ������� The video contrast is improved and the dark areas appear more dynamic�

Page 119: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

102

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3D SETTINGS]

Pleasereferto“3-10Projecting3Dvideos”(→page48)fortheoperation.

FORMATSelectthe3Dvideoformat(recording/transmissionformat).Selecttomatchthe3Dbroadcastand3Dmedia.Nor-mally,[AUTO]isselected.Pleaseselectthe3Dinputsignalformatwhenthe3Ddetectionsignaloftheformatcannotbedistinguished.

L/RINVERTInvertthedisplayorderoftheleftandrightvideos.Select[ON]ifyoufeeluncomfortablewiththe3Ddisplaywhen[OFF]isselected.

Page 120: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

103

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Using the Lens Memory Function [LENS MEMORY]

ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluesforeachinputsignalwhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFO-CUSbuttonsoftheprojector.Adjustedvaluescanbeappliedtothesignalyouselected.Thiswilleliminatetheneedtoadjustlensshift,focus,andzoomatthetimeofsourceselection.

STORE ������������������� Stores the current adjusted values in memory for each input signal�MOVE �������������������� Applies the adjusted values to the current signal�RESET �������������������� Returns the adjusted values to the last condition�

NOTE:• LensmemoryadjustmentswillbeautomaticallyregisteredtheENTRYLIST.TheselensmemoryadjustmentscanbeloadedfromtheENTRYLIST.(→ page 89)

Notethatperforming[CUT]or[ALLDELETE]intheENTRYLISTwilldeletelensmemoryadjustmentsaswellassourceadjust-ments. This deletion will not take effect until other adjustments is loaded.

• Forstoringeachadjustmentoflensshift,zoomandfocusascommonvalueforallinputsignal,storethemasreferencelensmemory.

Tostoreyouradjustedvaluesin[LENSMEMORY]:1. Project the connected device signal you want to adjust.

2.Adjusttheprojectingimageofposition,sizeandfocusbytheLENSSHIFT/HOMEPOSITION,ZOOM+/−,andFOCUS+/−buttons.

• Adjustmentcanbeperformedbytheremotecontrol.Pleasereferto“AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition”onpage22.

• Slightadjustmentbymovingtheprojectorpositionandbythetiltfootisnotsubjectof[LENSMEMORY].

3.Movethecursoron[STORE]andpressENTER.

4.Movethecursoron[YES]andpressENTER.

Page 121: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

104

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Tocalluptheadjustedvaluesfrom[LENSMEMORY]:1. Fromthemenu,select[ADJUST]→[LENSMEMORY]→[MOVE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ◀buttontoselectand[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton. Duringprojection,iftheadjustedvaluesforaninputsignalhavebeensaved,thelenswillshift.Ifnot,thelenswill

shiftaccordingtotheadjustedvaluesstoredintheselected[REF.LENSMEMORY][PROFILE]number.

Toautomaticallyapplytheadjustedvaluesatthetimeofsourceselection:1. Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(2)]→[REF.LENSMEMORY]→[LOADBYSIGNAL]and

press the ENTER button.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselectand[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton. Thiswillmovethelensautomaticallytothepositionatthetimeofsourceselectionaccordingtotheadjusted

values.

NOTE: • TheLensMemoryfunctionmaynotproduceacompletelyalignedimage(duetotolerancesinthelenses)usingtheadjustedvaluesstoredintheprojector.AftercallingupandapplyingtheadjustedvaluesfromtheLensMemoryfunction,finelyadjustthelensshift,zoomandfocustoproducethebestpossibleimage.

Page 122: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

105

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❻ Menu Descriptions & Functions [DISPLAY][PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE]

SUBINPUTSelecttheinputsignaltobedisplayedinthesub-display.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page70)fordetailsontheoperation.

MODESelecteitherPIPorPICTUREBYPICTUREwhenswitchingto2-screendisplay.

PICTURE SWAPThevideosinthemaindisplayandsub-displaywillbeswitched.Pleasereferto“4-2DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime”(→page72)fordetails.

PIP SETTINGSelectthedisplayposition,positionadjustmentandsizeofthesub-displayinthePIPscreen.

START POSITION ��� Selection of the display position of the sub-display when switching to the PIP screen�HORIZONTAL POSITION ������������������������������ Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the horizontal direction� The respective corners will serve

as reference points�VERTICAL POSITION ������������������������������ Adjust the display position of the sub-display in the vertical direction� The respective corners will serve as

reference points�SIZE ����������������������� Select the display size of the sub-display�

Page 123: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

106

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TIP:Thehorizontalpositionandverticalpositionaretheamountofmovementfromthereferencepoints.Forexample,whenTOP-LEFTisadjusted,thepositionisdisplayedwiththesameamountofmovementevenifdisplayedwithotherstartingpositions.Themaximumamountofmovementishalftheresolutionoftheprojector.

ReferencepointAdjustusingthehorizon-talposition

Sub-display Maindisplay

Referencepoint

Adjustusingtheverticalposition

TOP-LEFT TOP-RIGHT

BOTTOM-LEFT BOTTOM-RIGHT

ReferencepointReferencepoint

BORDERSelectthedisplayboundaryofthemaindisplayandsub-displayofthe[PICTUREBYPICTURE]screen.

Displayboundary

Maindisplay Sub-displayMaindisplay Sub-display MaindisplaySub-display

TIP:• 6stepscanbeselectedonthisprojector.

Page 124: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

107

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[GEOMETRIC CORRECTION]

MODESetpatternforcorrectingdistortion.If[OFF]isselected,the[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]becomesineffective.

KEYSTONECorrectdistortioninhorizontalandverticaldirections.

HORIZONTAL ��������� Adjustments when projecting from a diagonal direction to the screen�

VERTICAL �������������� Adjustments when projecting from the top or bottom direction to the screen�

TILT ����������������������� Adjusts the distortion when performing trapezoidal correction with the screen moved in the vertical direction using the lens shift�

THROW RATIO ������� Adjusts according to the projection ratio of the optional lens used�

Model name of lens unit

Adjustmentrange

NP16FL 7–8NP17ZL 12–18NP18ZL 17–23NP19ZL 21–37NP20ZL 34–55NP21ZL 50–85NP31ZL 7–10NP39ML 4

NOTE:• Whenpowerissuppliedtothedevice,theadjustmentvalueofthe[KEYSTONE]usedpreviouslyisretainedevenifthegradientofthedeviceischanged.

• Aselectricalcorrection iscarriedoutby [KEYSTONE], thebrightnessmaybe reducedor thescreenqualitymaydeterioratesometimes.

Page 125: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

108

5. Using On-Screen Menu

CORNERSTONEDisplaythe4-pointcorrectionscreenandadjustthetrapezoidaldistortionoftheprojectionscreen.Pleasereferto“CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE]”(→page42)fordetailson the operation.

HORIZONTALCORNER/VERTICALCORNERDistortioncorrectionforcornerprojectionsuchaswallsurfaces.

HORIZONTAL CORNER ������������������������������ Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the horizontal direction�

* Reverse angle correction is also possible�VERTICAL CORNER ������������������������������ Performs correction for projection onto a wall lying at an angle to the vertical direction�

* Reverse angle correction is also possible�

NOTE:• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalangleasthedeteriorationintheimagequalityincreasesasthedistortionadjustmentvolumegetslarger.

• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweentheupperandlowerorleftandrightsidesandthecenterofthescreenforprojectionscuttingacrosscorners.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommendedfor projections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus.

Page 126: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

109

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Adjustment method1.Alignthecursorwiththe[HORIZONTALCORNER]or[VERTICALCORNER]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORREC-

TION]menuandthenpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theadjustmentscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼▲◀▶ buttons to align the cursor (yellow box) with the target adjustment point and then press the ENTER button.

• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).

3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTERbutton.• Theadjustmentpointwillgobacktobeingacursor(yellowbox).

Explanationofscreentransition

• Theadjustmentpointsofthefourcorners(a,c,fandhinthedrawing)willmoveindependently.

• Thefollowingadjustmentpointsdifferatthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]and[VERTICALCORNER].

HORIZONTALCORNER:WhenPointbinthedrawingismoved,andtheuppersideandPointgaremoved,thelowersidewillmoveinaparallelmanner.

VERTICALCORNER:WhenPointdinthedrawingismoved,andtheleftsideandPointearemoved,therightsidewillmoveinaparallelmanner.

[Adjustmentpointsofthe[HORIZONTALCORNER]screenandmovementpointsoftheprojectionscreen]

a

b

b c

d e

f g h

a c

d e

fg

h

PointbwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsa,b,c

PointgwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsf,g,h

[Adjustmentpointsofthe[VERTICALCORNER]screenandmovementpointsoftheprojectionscreen]

a

a

b

bc

cd

dee

f

f

g

gh

h

PointdwillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsa,d,f

PointewillbedisplacedinaparallelmanneratthesametimeasPointsf,g,h

4. StartfromStep2onwardstoadjusttheotherpoints.

5. When the adjustment is completed, press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoalignthecursorwiththe[EXIT]inthead-justment screen and then press theENTER button.

• Switchtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuscreen.

Page 127: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

110

5. Using On-Screen Menu

WARPCorrectprojectedimagedistortiononaspecificsurfaceasacolumnorasphere.

NOTE:• Whenthemaximumadjustmentrangeisexceeded,distortionadjustmentisdisabled.Setuptheprojectoratanoptimalanglesincethemoretheadjustmentvolumegetslarge,themoreimagequalitygetsdeterioration.

• Pleasenotethattheimagewillgooutoffocusduetothedifferenceinthedistancebetweenperipheriesandthecenterofthescreenforprojectionscuttingacrosscornersasonacolumnorasphere.Lenseswithshortfocalpointsarealsonotrecommendedforprojections cutting across corners as the image will go out of focus.

Adjustment method1.Alignthecursorwiththe[WARP]ofthe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menuandthepresstheENTER.

• Adjustmentscreenwillbedisplayedon.

2. Press the ▼▲◀▶ buttons to align the cursor (blue box) with the target adjustment point and then press the ENTER.

• Thecursorwillchangeintoanadjustmentpoint(yellowincolor).

3. Press the ▼▲◀▶buttonstoadjustthecornersorsidesofthescreenandthenpresstheENTER.• Thecursorwillbacktoyellowbox.

Explanationforcorrectingdistortion

• Eightadjustmentpointscanbemovedindependently.

• Forleftandrightsides,use◀/▶buttonsforadjustingtherangeofdistortion,and▼/▲buttonsforadjustingthedistortionpeak.

• Fortopandbottomsides,use▼/▲buttonsforadjustingtherangeofdistortion,and◀/▶buttonsforadjustingthedistortionpeak.

• Forcorners,use▼▲◀▶buttonsformovingpositions.

ab

c

e

h

d

gf

ba c

d e

fg

h

4. For adjusting other points, repeat Step2 onwards.

5.Whentheadjustmentiscompleted,movethecursorontothe[EXIT]ontheadjustmentscreenandpressthe ENTER.

• Thescreenwillbeswitchedtothe[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]menu. Theadjustmentcompletionscreenwillbedisplayedon.

6. Press ◀ or ▶buttontomovethecursoronto[OK]thenpress[ENTER].

• TheadjustedvaluesforWARParestoredandthescreendisplaygoesbacktothe[GEOMETRICCORREC-TION].

PC TOOLRecallthegeometriccorrectiondatathatisregisteredintheprojectorbeforehand.Threetypesofcorrectiondatacanberegistered.

NOTE:• Aselectricalcorrectioniscarriedout ingeometriccorrection,thebrightnessmaybeaffectedandthepicturequalitymaybe

degraded.

Page 128: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

111

5. Using On-Screen Menu

RESETResettheadjustmentvaluethathasbeenselected inGEOMETRICCORRECTION(returntothe initialvalue). Itbecomesineffectivewhen[OFF]isselectedfor[MODE].• Theadjustedvaluecanberesetalsobypressingthe3DREFORMbuttonfortwosecondsorlongerontheremote

control.

[EDGE BLENDING]

Thisadjuststheedges(boundaries)oftheprojectionscreenwhenprojectinghighresolutionvideosusingacombina-tionofseveralprojectorsintheup,down,leftandrightpositions.

MODEThisenablesordisablestheEDGEBLENDINGfunction.WhenMODEissettoON,theTOP,BOTTOM,LEFT,RIGHT,BLACKLEVEL,andBLENDCURVEsettingscanbeadjusted.

TOP/BOTTOM/LEFT/RIGHTThisselectstheEDGEBLENDINGlocationsontheleft,right,topandbottomonthescreen.Thefollowingsettingscanbeadjustedwhenanitemisselected.(→page75)

CONTROL �������������� Enable TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT and RIGHT functions�MARKER ���������������� Set whether to display marker or not when adjusting the range and display position� When turned on, a

magenta marker for adjusting the range adjustment and a green marker for adjusting the display position will be displayed�

RANGE ������������������� Adjust the range (width) of the edge blending�POSITION �������������� Adjust the display position of the edge blending�

BLACKLEVELDividethescreenintoninepartsandkeeptheblackleveluniformforeachprojector.TheninedivisionsscreensareTOP-LEFT,TOP-CENTER,TOP-RIGHT,CENTER-LEFT,CENTER,CENTER-RIGHT,BOTTOM-LEFT,BOTTOM-CENTERandBOTTOM-RIGHT.(→page78)

BLENDCURVESetbrightnessfortheEDGEBLENDINGsection.

Page 129: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

112

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[MULTI SCREEN]

WHITEBALANCEThisadjuststhewhitebalanceforeachprojectorwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Thiscanbeadjustedwhen[MODE]issetto[ON].

BRIGHTNESS W, BRIGHTNESS R, BRIGHTNESS G, BRIGHTNESS B ������������������������������ Adjusting the black color of the video�CONTRAST W, CONTRAST R, CONTRAST G, CONTRAST B ������������������������������ Adjusting the white color of the video�

PICTURE SETTINGThissetsthedivisionconditionwhenprojectingusingacombinationofseveralprojectors.Pleasereferto“4.Multi-ScreenProjection”(→page66)fordetails.

MODE OFF Use the projector in a standalone state.

ZOOM Thisadjuststhepositionandwidthofthevideoareathatyouwishtodivide.Theedgeblendingwidthwillalsobeautomaticallysettothatwidth.

TILING Thisassignsthedividedscreenstotheprojectors.Theedgeblendingfunctionwillalsobe set automatically.

ZOOM HORIZONTALZOOM

Thismaginifiesthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALZOOM

Thismaginifiesthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

HORIZONTALPOSITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareainthehorizontaldirection.

VERTICALPO-SITION

Thisshiftsthevideoareaintheverticaldirection.

TILING WIDTH Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedhorizontally.

HEIGHT Thisselectsthenumberofprojectorstobearrangedvertically.

HORIZONTALPOSITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromtheleftamongthosearrangedhorizontally.

VERTICALPO-SITION

Thisselectsthepositionoftheprojectorstartingfromthetopamongthosearrangedvertically.

Page 130: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

113

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Conditions for using tiling• Alltheprojectorsneedtofulfilthefollowingconditions.• Thepanelsizemustbethesame• Theprojectionscreensizemustbethesame• Theleftandrightendsortopandbottomendsoftheprojectionscreenmustbeconsistent.• Thesettingsfortheleftandrightedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame• Thesettingsforthetopandbottomedgesoftheedgeblendingarethesame

Ifthetilingconditionsaresatisfied,thevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionwillbeautomaticallyextractedandprojected.

Ifthetilingconditionsarenotsatisfied,adjustthevideoscreenoftheprojectorateachinstallationpositionusingthezoomfunction.

• AssignauniquecontrolIDtoeachprojector.• Setthe“ColorSetting”and“DeepColorSetting”onyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerto“Auto”.Refertotheowner’smanualaccompanyingyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputerformoreinformation.

ConnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayerorcomputertothefirstprojector.ThenconnecttotheHDMIINinputterminalofthesecondandsubsequenttiledprojectors.

Tilingsettingexample)Numberofhorizontalunits=2,Numberofverticalunits=2

Horizontalorder=SecondunitVerticalorder=Firstunit

Page 131: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

114

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❼ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]

[MENU(1)]

SelectingMenuLanguage[LANGUAGE]Youcanchooseoneof30languagesforon-screeninstructions.

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingMenuColor[COLORSELECT]Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.

TurningOn/OffSourceDisplay[INPUTDISPLAY]ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasHDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,BNC(CV),BNC(Y/C),COMPUTER,HDBaseTtobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.

Turningmessagesonandoff[MESSAGEDISPLAY]Thisoptionselectswhetherornottodisplayprojectormessagesatthebottomoftheprojectedimage.Evenwhen“OFF”isselected,thesecuritylockwarningisdisplayed.Thesecuritylockwarningturnsoffwhenthesecuritylockiscanceled.

TurningON/OFFControlID[IDDISPLAY]ID DISPLAY ����������� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control

is pressed� (→ page 127)

Page 132: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

115

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[3DCAUTIONMESSAGE]Thisselectswhethertodisplayacautionmessageornotwhenswitchingtoa3Dvideo.ThedefaultconditionwhenshippedfromthefactoryisON.

OFF ������������������������ The 3D caution message screen will not be displayed�ON ������������������������� The 3D caution message screen will be displayed when switching to a 3D video� Press the ENTER button

to cancel the message�• Themessagewilldisappearautomaticallyafter60secondsorwhenotherbuttonsarepressed.Ifitdisap-

pears automatically, the 3D caution message will be displayed again when switching to a 3D video�

SelectingMenuDisplayTime[DISPLAYTIME]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.Thepresetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefactory preset.

[MENU(2)]

[MENUANGLE]Selectthedirectionfordisplayingthemenu.

[MENUPOSITION]Shiftthemenudisplayingposition.

HORISONTAL POSITION �����Shift the menu in the horizontal directions�VERTICAL POSITION ����������Shift the menu in the vertical directions�RESET ���������������������������������Reset the menu displaying position to the default factory setting (the screen center)�

TIP• Oncetheprojectorispoweredoff,themenudisplayingpositionwillresettothedefaultfactorysetting.• Inputterminalandmessagedisplayingpositionarenotinfluencedbythe[MENUPOSITION].

Page 133: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

116

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[INSTALLATION(1)]

SelectingProjectorOrientation[ORIENTATION]Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.

NOTE: • Pleaseconsultthedealerifyourequirespecialinstallationservicese.g.whenmountingtheprojectortoaceiling.Neverinstall

the projector on your own. This may result in the projector falling down and causing injury to people.

AUTO ��������������������� This automatically detects and projects the DESKTOP FRONT and CEILING FRONT�

NOTE:• TheDESKTOPREARandCEILINGREARwillnotbedetected.Pleaseselectmanually.

DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR

DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT

TIP:• CheckwhethertheautomaticDESKTOPFRONTisinstalledwithin±10degreesforfloorinstallationandwhethertheCEILINGFRONTiswithin±10degreesforceilinginstallation.Selectmanuallywhentheprojectionscreenisinverted.

Page 134: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

117

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SelectingAspectRatioandPositionforScreen[SCREENTYPE]

Screentype Setstheaspectratiooftheprojectionscreen.

FREE Theratioofthepanelisselected.Selectthiswhenprojectingmulti-screenand17:9screen(2K).

4:3screen Forascreenwitha4:3aspectratio

16:9 screen Forascreenwitha16:9aspectratio

16:10 screen Forascreenwitha16:10aspectratio

NOTE:• Afterchangingthescreentype,checkthesettingof[ASPECTRATIO]inthemenu.(→ page 98)

UsingtheWallColorCorrection[WALLCOLOR]

Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.

SelectingFanMode[FANMODE]FanModeisusedtosetthespeedoftheinternalcoolingfan.

MODE �������������������� Select mode for fan speed: AUTO, MIDDLE, and HIGH�AUTO: Standard mode supplying superior quietness�MIDDLE: Mode offering well-balanced quietness and parts life�HIGH: Output the maximum cooling power for prolong life of parts�

• Ifyouusetheprojectorcontinuouslyforseveraldays,pleasemakesuretoset[HIGH]for[FANMODE].

NOTE: • Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 135: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

118

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[LIGHTMODE]Adjusting theenergysavingssettingsandthebrightnessofeachprojector inmulti-screenprojection.Forenergysavingssettings,seepage39“3-7.ChangingLIGHTMODE/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingLIGHTMODE[LIGHTMODE]”.

LIGHTMODE NORMAL Thelightmoduleluminance(brightness)willbecome100%andthescreenwillturnbright.

ECO1 Bycontrollingthebrightnessandfanspeedaccordingtotheselectedsetting,energycanbe saved and motion noise and the power consumption can be lowered.Canbeselectedwhen[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeissetto[OFF].

ECO2

CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS

OFF [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modewillbecanceled.

ON Maintainsthebrightnessthatisineffectatthetime[ON]isselected.Unless[OFF]isse-lected,thesamesettingswillremainineffectevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff.• Tore-adjustthebrightness,firstturnthissettingOFFbeforemakingfurtheradjustments.

NOTE:• [CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeisafunctionusedtomaintainthebrightnessataconstantlevel.Colorwillnotbefixed.

REF.LIGHTADJUST Brightnesscanbeadjustedin1%incrementsfrom20to100%.Whenseveralprojectorsareusedformulti-screenprojection,thebrightnesscanbead-justed individually on each projector.Theadjustmentiseffectivewhen[NORMAL]isselectedforthe[LIGHTMODE]and[OFF]isselectedforthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS].

TIP:• Brightnessnormallydecreaseswithuse,butbyselecting[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]mode,sensorsinsidetheprojectordetect

brightness and automatically adjust the output, thereby maintaining a constant brightness throughout the life of the light module. However,ifoutputisalreadyatitsmaximum,brightnesswilldecreasewithuse. Forthisreason,whenusingmulti-screenprojection,itisrecommendedtoadjustthebrightnesstoaslightlylowerlevel,thensettingthe[CONSTANTBRIGHTNESS]modeto[ON].

[REF.WHITEBALANCE]Thisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalanceforallsignals.Thewhiteandblacklevelsofthesignalareadjustedforoptimumcolorreproduction.

CONTRAST R/CONTRAST G/CONTRAST B ������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s white color�BRIGHTNESS R/BRIGHTNESS G/BRIGHTNESS B ������������������������������ These adjust the picture’s black color�

3D GLASSESSelect3Dglassesmethod.

DLP® Link ������������� Select when using DLP® Link type 3D glasses�OTHERS ����������������� Select when using a non 3D emitter type glasses� It is required to connect the 3D emitter to the 3D SYNC

terminal of this projector� Please refer to page 48 about recommended items of 3D glasses and 3D emitter for this projector�

Page 136: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

119

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[INSTALLATION(2)]

[SHUTTERSETTINGS]Enablinganddisablingthelensshutterfunction.YoucanalsosethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeinandfadeoutwheneithertheSHUTTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheSHUTTER/CALIBRATIONbuttononthecabinetispressed.

POWERONSHUTTER

OPEN When thepower is turnedon, the lightsourcecomesonand thepicture isprojected.

CLOSE Thelightsourcedoesnotcomeonwhenthepoweristurnedon.WhentheSHUTTERbuttonispressed,theshutter isreleasedandthelightsource is turned on.

PICTUREMUTESHUTTER

OPEN Thelightsourceisstillonwhenthepictureisturnedoffforswitchingtheinputterminals.

CLOSE Thelightsourceturnsoffwhenthepictureisturnedoffforswitchingtheinputterminals.

FADEINTIME SethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeinaftertheSHUTTERbuttonispressed.Thetimecanbesetfrom0to10secondsinincrementsof1second.

FADEOUTTIME SethowlongthelightwilltaketofadeoutaftertheSHUTTERbuttonispressed.Thetimecanbesetfrom0to10secondsinincrementsof1second.

Page 137: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

120

5. Using On-Screen Menu

UsingtheReferenceLensMemoryFunction[REF.LENSMEMORY]ThisfunctionservestostoretheadjustedvaluescommontoallinputsourceswhenusingtheLENSSHIFT,ZOOMandFOCUSbuttonsoftheprojectorortheremotecontrol.Theadjustedvaluesstoredinmemorycanbeusedasareference to the current.

PROFILE ���������������� Select a stored [PROFILE] number�STORE ������������������� Stores the current adjusted values in memory as a reference�MOVE �������������������� Applies the adjusted reference values stored in [STORE] to the current signal�RESET �������������������� Reset selected [PROFILE] number [REF� LENS MEMORY] to the factory default settings�LOAD BY SIGNAL �� When you switch signals the lens will shift to the lens shift, zoom, and focus values for the selected [PRO-

FILE] number�If no adjusted values have been saved to [LENS MEMORY], the lens will apply [REF� LENS MEMORY] adjusted values� Alternatively, if no adjusted values have been saved to [REF� LENS MEMORY], the unit will return to factory default settings�

FORCED MUTE ������ To turn off the image during lens shift, select [YES]�

NOTE:• Adjustedvaluesin[REF.LENSMEMORY]willnotbereturnedtodefaultwhenperforming[CURRENTSIGNAL]or[ALLDATA]for[RESET]fromthemenu.

• Tostoreadjustedvaluesforeachinputsource,usetheLensMemoryfunction.(→ page 60, 103)• When[PICTUREMUTESHUTTER]under[SHUTTERSETTINGS]is[ON],[FORCEDMUTE]willturnoffthelightsourceandstopprojection.(→ previouspage)

[LENSCALIBRATION]Theadjustmentrangeofthezoom,focus,andshiftofthe[LENSMEMORY]iscalibrated.Besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.

[LENSPOSITION]Move the lens position.

HOME �������������������� Set back the lens to the home position�TYPE ���������������������� Select this for using the lens unit NP39ML� The lens position will be adjusted to the appropriate position�

Page 138: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

121

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[CONTROL]

TOOLS

ADMINISTRATORMODEThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.

MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.(→page82)

NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES

Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings�Clear this check box to save your projector settings�

NEWPASSWORD/CONFIRMPASS-WORD

Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Up to 10 alphanumeric characters

Page 139: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

122

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROGRAMTIMER

Thisoptionturnson/standbytheprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsLIGHTmodeautomaticallyataspecifiedtime.

NOTE:• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→ page 125) MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected. Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabouttwoweeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemainpowerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorfortwoweeksormore,itrequirestoset[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS]featureagain.

Setting a new program timer1. On the PROGRAM TIMER screen, use the ▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[PROGRAMLIST]screenwillbedisplayed.

2. Select a blank program number and press the ENTER button.

The[ (EDIT)]screenwillbedisplayed.

3.Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.

ACTIVE ������������������ Place a check mark to enable the program�

Page 140: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

123

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DAY ������������������������ Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-FRI]� To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�

TIME ���������������������� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�FUNCTION ������������� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting

[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [INPUT] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [LIGHT MODE] will allow you to select [LIGHT MODE] by setting [ADVANCED SET-TINGS]�

ADVANCED SETTINGS ������������������������������ Select power on/off, a type of video source, or LIGHT MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�REPEAT ������������������ Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the

check mark�4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillcompletethesettings.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.

5. Select[ (BACK)]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.

6. Select[EXIT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[TOOLS]screen.

NOTE:• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingisignored.• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe

cleared automatically and the program will be disabled.• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.• Twodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted

until the power off becomes possible.• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris

enabled.• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoitmanuallysoasnottoleavetheprojectoronforalongperiodoftime.

Page 141: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

124

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Activating the program timer

1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.

Theselectionscreenwillbedisplayed.

2. Press the ▼buttontoalignthecursorwith[ON]andthenpresstheENTERbutton. Returntothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.

NOTE:• Whentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]havenotbeensetto[ON],theprogramwillnotbeexecutedevenifthe[ACTIVE]itemsintheprogramlisthavebeenticked.

• Evenwhentheeffectivesettingsofthe[PROGRAMTIMER]aresetto[ON],the[PROGRAMTIMER]willnotworkuntilthe[PRO-GRAMTIMER]screenisclosed.

Editing the programmed settings

1.Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.

2.Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.

3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theprogrammedsettingswillbechanged.

Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.

Changing the order of programs

1.Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.

3.PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.

Theorderoftheprogramswillbechanged.

Deleting the programs

1.Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ (DELETE)].

3. Press the ENTER button.

Theconfirmationscreenwillbedisplayed.

4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Theprogramwillbedeleted.

Thiswillcompletedeletingtheprogram.

Page 142: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

125

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DATEANDTIMESETTINGS

Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.NOTE:Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabout2weeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemainpowerisofffor2weeksormore,thebuilt-inclockwillcease.Ifthebuilt-inclockceases,setthedateandtimeagain.Thebuilt-in clock will not cease while in the standby mode.

TIME ZONE SETTINGS �������������� Select your time zone�DATE AND TIME SETTINGS ������ Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)�

INTERNET TIME SERVER: If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be syn-chronized with an Internet time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup�UPDATE: Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not available unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�

SUMMER TIME SETTINGS ������� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�

[MOUSE]Thisfunctioncannotbeusedinthisdevice.Itisusedforfutureexpansionpurposesonly.

Page 143: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

126

5. Using On-Screen Menu

DisablingtheCabinetButtons[CONTROLPANELLOCK]ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.

NOTE:• Howtocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK] Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]issetto[ON],presstheSOURCEbuttononthecabinetforabout10secondstocancelthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK].

TIP:• Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.

EnablingSecurity[SECURITY]ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page45)

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingCommunicationSpeed[COMMUNICATIONSPEED]ThisfeaturesetsthebaudrateofthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Itsupportsdataratesfrom4800to115200bps.Thedefaultis38400bps.Selecttheappropriatebaudrateforyourequipmenttobeconnected(dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns).

NOTE:• Select[38400bps]orlesswhenusingthesuppliedsoftwareprograms.• Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Page 144: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

127

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SettingIDtotheProjector[CONTROLID]YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROLIDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogetherusingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.

CONTROL ID NUMBER �������Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�CONTROL ID �����������������������Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID setting�

NOTE: • When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupporttheCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControlID.

Assigning or Changing the Control ID1. Turn on the projector.

2. Press the ID SET button on the remote control.

TheCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.

IftheprojectorcanbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[AC-TIVE]willbedisplayed.IftheprojectorcannotbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[INACTIVE]willbedisplayed.Tooperatetheinactiveprojector,assignthecontrolIDusedfortheprojectorbyusingthefollowingprocedure(Step3).

3.PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSET button on the remote control.

Example:

Toassign“3”,pressthe“3”buttonontheremotecontrol.

NoIDmeansthatalltheprojectorscanbeoperatedtogetherwithasingleremotecontrol.Toset“NoID”,enter“000”orpresstheCLEARbutton.

TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.4. Release the ID SET button.

TheupdatedCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.

NOTE: • TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.• Ifoneofbuttonsof theremotecontrolwithoutbatteries ispressedaccidentally,currentspecifiedIDwillbecleared.

Page 145: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

128

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TurningOnorOffRemoteSensor[REMOTESENSOR]Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK,andHDBaseT.

NOTE:• TheremotecontroloftheprojectorwillnotbeabletoreceivesignalsifthepowersupplyoftheHDBaseTsupportedtransmissiondeviceconnectedtotheprojectoronwhich“HDBaseT”settinghasbeenON.

TIP:• Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrolsensorof

the projector, change another option.

Page 146: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

129

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[NETWORK SETTINGS]

Important:• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.• WhenusingawiredLANconnection,connectaLANcable(Ethernetcable)totheLANport(RJ-45)oftheprojector.(→ page

153)

TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection

To set up the projector for a LAN connection:Select[WIREDLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLAN.Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page130)To recall LAN settings stored in the profile number:Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page130)To connect a DHCP server:Turnon[DHCP]forwiredLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithoutusingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page130)

To receive error messages via e-mail:Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page132)

Page 147: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

130

5. Using On-Screen Menu

WIRED LAN

PROFILES • Thesettingsforusingthebuilt-inEthernet/HDBaseTportintheprojector can be recorded in the projector memory in two ways.

• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor[DHCP]andtheotheroptions.

Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.Thiswillstoreyoursettingsinmemory.

• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory: Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-FILES]list.

Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.• Select[DISABLE]whennotconnectingtoawiredLAN

DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmasknumberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnected to the projector.

Upto12numericcharacters

DNSCONFIGURA-TION

SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.

Upto12numericcharacters

RECONNECT Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhavechanged[PROFILES].

Page 148: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

131

5. Using On-Screen Menu

PROJECTORNAME

PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Up to 16 alphanu-meric characters and symbols

DOMAINSetahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.

HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Up to 15 alphanumeric characters

DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters

Page 149: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

132

5. Using On-Screen Menu

ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroferrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.

Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�

Sample of a message to be sent from the projector:

Subject:[Projector]ProjectorInformationTHECOOLINGFANHASSTOPPED.[INFORMATION]PROJECTORNAME:PX1004ULSeriesLIGHTHOURSUSED:0000[H]

HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Up to 15 alphanumeric characters

DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters

SENDER'SAD-DRESS

Specifythesender’saddress. Up to 60 alphanu-meric characters and symbols

SMTPSERVERNAME

TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters

RECIPIENT'SAD-DRESS1,2,3

Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Up to 60 alphanu-meric characters and symbols

TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.NOTE:• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail. Should this happen, check if theRecipient’sAddress iscorrectly set.

• Unless any one of the [SENDER'SADDRESS], [SMTPSERVER'SNAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]isnotavailable.

• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting[TESTMAIL].

Page 150: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

133

5. Using On-Screen Menu

NETWORKSERVICE

HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Up to 10 alphanumeric characters

PJLink This option allows you to set a passwordwhen you use thePJLinkfeature.NOTE: • Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,

consult with your dealer. • WhatisPJLink? PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors

of different manufacturers. This standard protocol is established by JapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-tion(JBMIA)in2005.

TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom

the menu.

Upto32alphanumericcharacters

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.

TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.

Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery�Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery�

CRESTRON ROOMVIEW:TurnonoroffwhencontrollingtheprojectorfromyourPC.CRESTRONCONTROL:Turn on or offwhen controlling theprojector from your controller.• CONTROLLERIPADDRESS:EnteryourIPaddressofCREST-RONSERVER.

• IPID:EnteryourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.

Upto12numericcharacters

ExtronXTP SetforconnectingthisprojectortotheExtronXTPtransmitter.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabletoconnectwiththeXTPtrans-mitter.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabletoconnectwiththeXTPtransmitter.

TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com

Page 151: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

134

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE OPTIONS]

SettingAutoAdjust[AUTOADJUST]ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfornoiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].

OFF ������������������������ The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�NORMAL ���������������� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�FINE ����������������������� Select this option if fine adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-

MAL]is selected�

TIP:• Thedefaultsettingwhenshippedfromthefactoryis[NORMAL].• WhentheAUTOADJ.buttonispressed,thesame[FINE]adjustmentiscarriedout.

[COLORSYSTEM]ThisfeatureallowsyoutoselecttheTVvideosignal,whichdiffersfromcountrytocountry(NTSC,PAL,etc.).Thisissetto[AUTO]byfactorydefault.Setthisiftheprojectorcannotidentifythesignalautomatically.

SelectingDefaultSource[DEFAULTINPUTSELECT]Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

LAST ���������������������� Set the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�AUTO ��������������������� Search for an active source in order of HDMI → DisplayPort → BNC → BNC(CV) → BNC(Y/C) → COMPUTER

→ HDBaseT → SLOT and displays the first found source�HDMI ��������������������� Display the digital source from the HDMI IN terminal every time the projector is turned on� DisplayPort ������������ Display the digital source from the DisplayPort IN terminal every time the projector is turned on� BNC ����������������������� Project the input signal from the BNC IN terminalBNC(CV) ���������������� Project the input signal from the BNC(CV) input terminal�BNC(Y/C) ��������������� Project the input signal from the BNC(Y/C) input terminal�COMPUTER ����������� Display the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN terminal every time the projector is turned on�HDBaseT ���������������� Project the HDBaseT or WIRED LAN signal�SLOT ���������������������� Project the picture via the optional board (sold separately) inserted into the SLOT�

Page 152: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

135

5. Using On-Screen Menu

SettingClosedCaption[CLOSEDCAPTION]ThisoptionsetsseveralclosedcaptionmodesthatallowtexttobesuperimposedontheprojectedimageofVideoorS-Video.Thesubtitlesandtextwillbedisplayedashortwhileaftertheon-screenmenudisappears.

OFF ������������������������ This exits the closed caption mode�CAPTION 1-4 ��������� Text is superimposed�TEXT 1-4 ���������������� Text is displayed�

SelectingaColororLogoforBackground[BACKGROUND]Usethisfeaturetodisplayablue/blackscreenorlogowhennosignalisavailable.Thedefaultbackgroundis[BLUE].

NOTE: • Evenwhenthebackgroundlogoisselected,iftwopicturesaredisplayedin[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]mode,thebluebackground

is displayed without the logo when there is no signal.

Page 153: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

136

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[POWER OPTIONS]

SelectingPower-savingin[STANDBYMODE]Settingthepowerconsumptioninthestandbymode.

NORMAL ���������������� In the standby mode, the power consumption of the projector is 0�20 W (110-130 V) / 0�30 W (200-240 V)�In the standby mode, the POWER indicator lights up in red while the STATUS indicator will go off�• Whensetto[NORMAL],thefollowingterminalsandfunctionswillbedisabled.HDMIOUTterminals,

Ethernet/HDBaseT port, LAN function, mail notification functionNETWORK STANDBY ������������������������������ Compared to [NORMAL], the power consumption in the standby mode is higher but power can be supplied

to the projector using a wired LAN�In the standby mode, the power indicator will light up in orange while the status indicator will be turned off�

Important:• When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselected,[AUTOPOWEROFF]willturngreyincolorandbedisabledand[0:15]willbeselected

automatically.• Inthefollowingconditions,the[STANDBYMODE]settingwillbedisabledandtheprojectorwillgointothesleepmode.Inthe

sleep mode, the fans in the projector rotate for the purpose of interior parts protection.* Sleepmodereferstothemodewherebythefunctionalrestrictionsduetothe[STANDBYMODE]settingareremoved.• When[ON]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[AMXBEACON]• When[ENABLE]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[CRESTRON]→[CRESTRONCONTROL].• When[ON]isselectedunder[NETWORKSERVICE]→[ExtronXTP].• When[HDBaseT]isselectedunder[CONTROL]→[REMOTESENSOR]• WhenasignalisbeingreceivedfromaHDBaseTtransmissiondevice

• When[NORMAL]isselected,the[AUTOPOWERONSELECT]displayturnsgreyincolorandisdisabled,and[OFF]isautomati-cally selected.

NOTE:• WhenconnectingtoaHDBaseTtransmissiondevicesoldcommercially,ifthetransmissiondeviceissettotransmitremotecontrol

signals, the power consumption of the projector in the standby mode will increase.

TIP:• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.• ThepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodewillnotbeincludedincalculatingCO2 emission reduction.

EnablingDirectPowerOn[DIRECTPOWERON]Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.ThiseliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.

Page 154: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

137

5. Using On-Screen Menu

TurningOntheProjectorByApplyingComputerSignal[AUTOPOWERONSELECT]Ifsetto[NETWORKSTANDBY],theprojectorautomaticallydetectsthesynchronizingsignalinputfromthefollowingselectedterminalsandprojectsthepictureaccordingly:Computer,HDMI,DisplayPort,HDBaseT,andSLOT.

OFF ������������������������ AUTO POWER ON SELECT function will be switch off�HDMI, DisplayPort, COMPUTER, HDBaseT, SLOT ������������������������������ When a computer signal of a selected input terminal is detected, the power supply of the projector will be

turned on automatically and the computer screen will be projected�

NOTE: • IfyouwanttoactivatetheAUTOPOWERONSELECTfunctionafterpoweringOFFtheprojector,interruptthesignalfromtheinput

terminals or disconnect the computer cable from the projector and wait for at least 3 seconds before inputting the signal from theselectedterminal.WhentheprojectoristurnedoffandentersNETWORKSTANDBYmode,butsignalsfromthecomputercontinuetobesenttheprojector,theprojectormaintainsNETWORKSTANDBYmodeandwillnotturnONautomatically.Inaddi-tion,ifsignalsfromHDMI,DisplayPortorHDBaseTcontinuetobesenttotheprojector,dependingonthesettingsofconnectedexternaldevices,theprojectormayturnONautomaticallyevenifitispoweredoffandNETWORKSTANDBYmodeisineffect.

• ThisfunctiondoesnotworkwhencomponentsignalscomeintoCOMPUTERINterminalorwhencomputersignalsareSynconGreenorCompositeSync.

EnablingPowerManagement[AUTOPOWEROFF]Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:0:05,0:10,0:15,0:20,0:30,1:00)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

NOTE:• ThepowerwillnotgooffautomaticallywhenasignalfromtheEthernet/HDBaseTportisbeingprojected.• [AUTOPOWEROFF]appearsingreywhenthe[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NETWORKSTANDBY]and[0:15]willbesetautomati-

cally.

UsingOffTimer[OFFTIMER]1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00.

2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control.

3. The remaining time starts counting down.

4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.

NOTE:• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.

SettingfortheOptionalBoard[SLOTPOWER]Whenusingtheoptionalboardinstalledintheslot,setthefollowingoptions.

PROJECTOR ON �����������������This feature will turn on or off the power to the optional board� OFF: Forcibly turn off the power to the optional board installed in the slot�ON (Default): Turn on the power to the optional board installed in the slot�

PROJECTOR STANDBY �������This feature will automatically enable or disable the optional board installed in the slot when the projector is in standby�DISABLE: Select this option to disable the optional board in the projector standby�ENABLE (Default): Select this option to enable the optional board in the projector standby�

Page 155: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

138

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Returning to Factory Default [RESET]TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)exceptthefollowing:

[CURRENTSIGNAL]Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],[AS-PECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].

[ALLDATA]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.AllitemscanberesetEXCEPT[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COM-MUNICATIONSPEED],[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LIGHTHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],and[WIREDLAN].

[ALLDATA(INCLUDINGENTRYLIST)]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypresetexcept[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[EDGEBLENDING],[MULTISCREEN],[SCREENTYPE],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[DATEANDTIMESETTINGS],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LIGHTHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],and[WIREDLAN].Alsodeletesallthesignalsinthe[ENTRYLIST]andreturnstothefactorypreset.

NOTE:LockedsignalsinEntryListcannotbereset.

Page 156: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

139

5. Using On-Screen Menu

❽ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlightmoduleusage.Thisitemhasninepages.Theinformationincludedis as follows:

TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.

[USAGE TIME]

[LIGHTHOURSUSED](H)[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)

• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]

Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page41)

[SOURCE(1)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.

Page 157: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

140

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[SOURCE(2)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE3DFORMAT

[SOURCE(3)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICALFREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNCPOLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCENAMEENTRYNO.

[SOURCE(4)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE3DFORMAT

Page 158: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

141

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[WIRED LAN]

IPADDRESS SUBNETMASKGATEWAY MACADDRESS

[VERSION(1)]

FIRMWARE DATASUB-CPU

[OTHERS]

DATETIME PROJECTORNAMEMODELNO. SERIALNUMBERCONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]isset)

Page 159: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

142

5. Using On-Screen Menu

[HDBaseT]

SIGNALQUALITY OPERATIONMODELINKSTATUS HDMISTATUS

Page 160: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

143

❶ Mounting a lens (sold separately)Thisprojectorcanbeusedwith8kindsofoptionallenses(soldseparately).ThedescriptionsherearefortheNP18ZL(standardzoom)lens.Mountotherlensesinthesamemanner.Seepage172 for lens options.Important:• Forusingthefollowingoptionlenses,besuretocarryout[LENSCALIBRATION]afterreplacingthelens.(→ page 18, 120) NP16FL,NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZL,NP31ZL

WARNING:(1)Turnoffthepowerandwaitforthecoolingfantostop,(2)turnoffthemainpowerswitch,(3)disconnectthepowercordandwaitfortheunittocoolbeforemountingorremovingthelens.Failuretodosocanresultineyeinjury,electricshock,orburninjuries.

NOTE:• Theprojectorandlensesaremadeofprecisionparts.Donotsubjectthemtoshockorexcessiveforces.• Removetheseparatelysoldlenswhenmovingtheprojector.Ifnot,thelenscouldbesubjecttoshockwhiletheprojectorisbeingmoved,damagingthelensandthelensshiftmechanism.

• Whendismountingthelensfromtheprojector,returnthelenspositiontothehomepositionbeforeturningoffthepower.Failuretodosomaypreventthelensfrombeingmountedordismountedbecauseofnarrowspacebetweentheprojectorandthelens.

• Nevertouchthelenssurfacewhiletheprojectorisoperating.• Beverycarefulnottoletdirt,grease,etc.,onthelenssurfaceandnottoscratchthelenssurface.• Performtheseoperationsonaflatsurfaceoverapieceofcloth,etc.,topreventthelensfromgettingscratched.• Whenleavingthelensofftheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,mountthedustcapontheprojectortopreventdustordirtfromgettinginside.Ifthelensremainsdetachedfromtheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,dustmaycollectwithintheopticalunitand damage the lens, causing deterioration of projected image.

• Lensesotherthanspecifiedinthismanualcannotbemountedonthisprojector.

Mounting the lens1.Removethedustcapfromtheprojector.

Pushthetongueatthetopleftoutwardandpulltheknobatthecenterofthecap.

2.Removethelenscaponthebackofthelens.

• ThelensNP18ZLisusedasanexample.

NOTE: • Makesuretoremovethelenscapattheunitbackside.Ifthelens

unit with the lens cap remaining on is installed on the projector, it may cause of malfunction.

3. Hold the lens unit aligning the labelled arrow on the unit coming top and insert the unit to the projector.

Insertthelensslowlyallthewayin,keepingthepositioningslitatthesameangle.

Arrowmark

6. Connecting to Other Equipment

Page 161: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

144

6. Installation and Connections

4. Turn the lens unit rightward until click is heard.

Thelensisnowfastenedontotheprojector.

TIP:MountingthelenstheftpreventionscrewFastenthelenstheftpreventionscrewincludedwiththeprojectortothebottomoftheprojectorsothatthelenscannotberemovedeasily.

Removing the lens

Beforeremovingthelens:

1. Turn on the projector and display an image. (→ page 17)

2. Press and hold the SHUTTER/HOME POSITION button over 2 seconds.

Thelenspositionwillbemovedtothehomeposition.

3. Turnoffthemainpowerswitch,andthenunplugthepowercord.

4. Wait until the projector cabinet is cool enough to handle.

1. While pressing the LENS release button on the projector’s frontpanelfullyin,turnthelenscounterclockwise.

Thelenscomesoff.

NOTE:IfthelenscannotberemovedwhentheLENSreleasebuttonispressed,checkwhetherthelenstheftpreventionscrewismounted.

2.Afterslowlypullingthelensofftheprojector,releasetheLENS release button.

- Afterremovingthelens,mountthelenscaps(frontandback)includedwiththelensbeforestoringthelens.

- Ifnolensisgoingtobemountedontheprojector,mountthedustcapincludedwiththeprojector.

Page 162: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

145

6. Installation and Connections

❷ Making ConnectionsAcomputercable,BNCcable(5-coretype),HDMIcable,oraDisplayPortcablecanbeusedtoconnecttoacomputer.Theconnectioncableisnotenclosedwiththeprojector.Pleasegetreadyasuitablecablefortheconnection.

Analog RGB signal connection

• Connectthecomputercabletothedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputerandtheCOMPUTERINterminalontheprojector.Pleaseuseacomputercableattachedwithaferritecore.

• Whenconnectingthedisplayoutputterminal(miniD-sub15pin)onthecomputertotheBNCINterminal,useaconversioncabletoconverttheBNCcable(5core)toaminiD-sub15pincable.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButton on the remote control

COMPUTERIN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNCIN BNC COMPUTER2

COMPUTER IN

BNC IN

Computercable(soldcommercially)

RGB-to-BNCcable(notsupplied)

NOTE:Pleasechecktheoperatingmanualofthe computer as the name, position and direc-tion of the terminal may differ depending on the computer.

Page 163: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

146

6. Installation and Connections

Digital RGB signal connection

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableHDMIcablebetweenthecomputer’sHDMIoutputterminalandtheprojector’sHDMIINterminal.

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableDisplayPortcablebetweenthecomputer’sDisplayPortoutputterminalandtheprojector’sDisplayPortINterminal.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButton on the remote control

HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

DisplayPortIN DisplayPort DisplayPort

DisplayPort INHDMI IN

HDMIcable(notsupplied) DisplayPortcable(notsupplied)

Page 164: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

147

6. Installation and Connections

CautionswhenconnectinganHDMIcable• UseacertifiedHighSpeedHDMI®CableorHighSpeedHDMI®CablewithEthernet.

Cautions when connecting a DisplayPort cable• UseacertifiedDisplayPortcable.

• Dependingonthecomputer,sometimemayberequireduntiltheimageisdisplayed.

• SomeDisplayPortcables(commerciallyavailable)havelocks.

• Todisconnectthecable,pressthebuttononthetopofthecable’sterminal,thenpullthecableout.

• PowercanbesuppliedtotheconnectingdevicefromtheDisplayPortINterminal(maximumof1.65W).However,power will not be supplied to the computer.

• WhensignalsfromadevicethatusesasignalconverteradapterareconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal,insomecasestheimagemaynotbedisplayed.

• WhentheHDMIoutputofacomputerisconnectedtotheDisplayPortINterminal,useaconverter(commerciallyavailable).

Page 165: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

148

6. Installation and Connections

CautionswhenusingaDVIsignal• WhenthecomputerhasaDVIoutputterminal,useacommerciallyavailableconvertercabletoconnectthecom-

putertotheprojector’sHDMIINterminal(onlydigitalvideosignalscanbeinput).

HDMI IN

NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal• Turnoffthepowerofthecomputerandprojectorbeforeconnectingdevices.• Whenavideodeckisconnectedviaascanconverter,etc.,thedisplaymaynotbecorrectduringfast-forwardingandrewinding.• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.

• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMI.Finally,turnonyourPC. Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subterminalmayresult in no picture being displayed from the digital output of the graphics card.

• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojector isrunning.If thesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthenreconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

• TheCOMPUTERINterminalssupportWindowsPlugandPlay.TheBNCINterminaldoesnotsupportWindowsPlugandPlay.• AMacsignaladapter(commerciallyavailable)mayberequiredtoconnectaMaccomputer. ToconnectaMaccomputerequippedwithaMiniDisplayPorttotheprojector,useacommerciallyavailableMiniDisplayPort→ DisplayPortconvertercable.

Page 166: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

149

6. Installation and Connections

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

Connecting an External Monitor

Youcanconnectaseparate,externalmonitortoyourprojectortosimultaneouslyviewonamonitorthecomputeranalogimageyou’reprojecting.• SignalsthatcanbeoutputfromtheHDMI-OUTterminalareHDMI,DiplayPort,HDBaseT,andSLOT.• PleaserefertoPage70whendisplayingthePIP/PBPscreen.

NOTE:• WhenoutputtingHDMIsignals,turnonthepowerofthevideodeviceontheoutputsideandkeepitconnectedbeforeinputtingvideosignalsintothisdevice.TheHDMIOUTterminalsoftheprojectorareequippedwithrepeaterfunctions.WhenadeviceisconnectedtotheHDMIOUTterminal,theresolutionoftheoutputsignalislimitedbytheresolutionsupportedbytheconnecteddevice.

• InthecaseoftheHDMIOUTterminaloftheprojector,thetheoreticalnumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedinaseriesisseven.Themaximumnumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedmaybereducedbytheexternalenvironmentandqualityofthesignalandcable,etc.ThenumberofunitsthatcanbeconnectedmaydifferdependingontheHDCPversion,restrictiononthenumberofHDCPrepeatersinthesourcedeviceandthequalityofthecable.Theoverallsystemneedstobecheckedinadvancewhenbuild-ing a system.

• Whenthe[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NORMAL],videowillnotbeoutputiftheprojectorgoesintothestandbymode.Setthemodeto[NETWORKSTANDBY],turnonthepowerofthetransmissiondeviceandkeepitinaconnectedstate.

• HDMIrepeaterfunctionwillnotbefunctionedifswitchingterminalsandputtingin/pullingouttheHDMIcableisperformedonthe 2nd projector and after.

Computercable(VGA)(notsupplied)

HDMIcable(notsupplied)

Page 167: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

150

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting Your Blu-ray Player or Other AV EquipmentComponentvideosignal/S-videosignalconnection

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButton on the remote control

BNC(CV) BNC(CV) VIDEO

BNC(Y/C) BNC(Y/C) S-VIDEO

CV Y C

BNC(CV)

BNC(Y) BNC(C)

BNCcable(notsupplied)

Audioequipment

Page 168: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

151

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting Component Input

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputterminalafterturningontheprojector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButton on the remote control

COMPUTERIN COMPUTER COMPUTER1

BNCIN BNC COMPUTER2

NOTE:• Whenthesignalformatissetto[AUTO](defaultfactorysettingwhenshipped),thecomputersignalandcomponentsignalareautomatically distinguished and switched. If the signals cannot bedistinguished, select [COMPONENT]under [ADJUST]→ [VIDEO]→[SIGNALTYPE]intheon-screenmenuoftheprojector.

• ToconnecttoavideodevicewithaDterminal,usethesoldseparatelyDterminalconverteradapter(modelADP-DT1E).

COMPUTER IN

15-pin-to-RCA(female)×3cableadapter(ADP-CV1E) BNC(male)-to-RCA(male)conversion

cable×3(soldcommercially)

ComponentvideoRCA×3cable(notsupplied)

Blu-rayplayerAudioEquipment

Page 169: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

152

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting HDMI InputYoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourBlu-rayplayer,harddiskplayer,ornotebooktypePCtotheHDMIINter-minal of your projector.

InputterminalSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButton on the remote control

HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIterminal:Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.Thiswillprovideimprovedimagecontrastandmoredetaileddarkareas.Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.

• WhenconnectingtheHDMIINterminaloftheprojectortotheBlu-rayplayer,theprojector’svideolevelcanbemadesettingsinaccordancewiththeBlu-rayplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[ADJUST]→[VIDEO]→ [VIDEOLEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.

HDMI IN

Audiocable(notsupplied)

HDMIcable(notsupplied)UseHighSpeedHDMI®Cable.

Page 170: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

153

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting to a Wired LANTheprojectorcomesstandardwithaEthernet/HDBaseTport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable. TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[SETUP]→[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page129).

Example of LAN connectionExampleofwiredLANconnection

Ethernet/HDBaseT

Server

Hub

LANcable(notsupplied)

NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLANcable.

Page 171: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

154

6. Installation and Connections

Connecting to an HDBaseT transmission device (sold commercially)HDBaseTisaconnectionstandardforhomeappliancesthatisestablishedbytheHDBaseTAlliance.UseaLANcablesoldcommerciallytoconnecttheEthernet/HDBaseTportoftheprojector(RJ-45)toaHDBaseTtransmission device sold commercially.TheEthernet/HDBaseTportoftheprojectorsupportsHDMIsignals(HDCP)fromtransmissiondevices,controlsignalsfromexternaldevices(serial,LAN)andremotecontrolsignals(IRcommands).

Connection example

Ethernet/HDBaseT

Computer(forcontroluse)Computer(foroutputuse)

Exampleofatransmissiondevice

Remotecontrol

HDMIoutputvideodevice

NOTE:• Pleaseuseashieldedtwistedpair(STP)cableofCategory5eorhigherfortheLANcable(soldcommercially).• ThemaximumtransmissiondistanceovertheLANcableis100m.(themaximumdistanceis70mfora4Ksignal)• Pleasedonotuseothertransmissionequipmentbetweentheprojectorandtransmissionequipment.Thepicturequalitymaybe

deteriorated as a result.• ThisprojectorisnotguaranteedtoworkwithallHDBaseTtransmissiondevicessoldcommercially.

Page 172: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

155

6. Installation and Connections

Portrait projection (vertical orientation)Thisprojectorcanbeinstalledverticallytodisplaycomputerimagesinportrait orientation.Themenudisplayingpositioncanbeshiftedbyselectingthe[SETUP]→ [MENU(2)]→[MENUANGLE].

Precautions during installation• Pleasedonotinstalltheprojectorinaverticalorientationontopofthefloorortableonitsown.Ifnot,theprojec-

tormayfallover,resultingininjury,damageormalfunction.

• Astandforsupportingtheprojectorneedstobemadeforthispurposetokeepintakeairflowsecurelyandpreventivemeasureoffallingover.Thestandmustbedesignedsuchthatthecenterofgravityoftheprojectorislocatedwellwithinthelegsofthestand.Ifnot,theprojectormayfalloverandresultininjury,damageandmalfunction.

• Iftheprojectorisinstalledonwhichtheintakeventfacingdown,opticalpartlifemaybeshorten.

Page 173: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

156

6. Installation and Connections

Design and manufacturing conditions for the standPleasehireaninstallationserviceprovider(forafee)forthedesignandmanufactureofacustomizedstandtobeusedforportraitprojection.Pleaseensurethatthedesigncomplieswiththefollowingconditions:

• Thereare3ventilationholesatthebottomoftheprojector.Theseholesshouldremainunobstructed.

• Usethe6screwholesatthebackoftheprojectortosecureittothestand.

Screwholecenterdimension:300×300(pitch=150)mm

Screwholedimensionontheprojector:M4withthemaximumdepth16mm

4ofthelegscanbeunscrewedforremoval.

• Horizontaladjustmentmechanism(forexample,boltsandnutsin4places)

• Pleasedesignthestandsothatitdoesnoteasilytoppleover.

Reference drawings* Thedrawingshowingthedimensionalrequirementsisnotanactualstanddesigndrawing.

300

150 150124.5

[Side View][Front View]

(Unit: mm)

Horizontal adjuster

Air exhaust

6 - M4 bolt

Air intakeAir intake

Air intake

Page 174: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

157

6. Installation and Connections

Stacking projectorsTheprojectedimagebrightnesscanbedoubledbygravitystackinguptotwoprojectorswithoutexternalsupport.Thisiscalled“StackingProjection”.2projectorscanbestackedontopofeachotherfor“Stacking”setup.

CAUTION:• Aminimumoftwopersonsarerequiredtocarrytheprojector.Otherwisetheprojectormaytumbleordrop,caus-ingpersonalinjury.

• Gripthehandlesformovingtheprojector.

NOTE:• Projectorswithdifferentmodelnumberscannotbegravitystacked. Optional lenses with the same model numbers must be used for stacking projection.• Forstackingprojectors,attachthesuppliedfourstackingholderstothetopofthelowerprojector.(→ nextpage)• Itdoesnotsupportoverlayaccuracybystackedprojectors.Preciseimagesassmalltextsanddetailedgraphicscannotbeclearly

read or seen.• Useacommerciallyavailabledistributionamplifiertoboththeprimary(upper)andthesecondary(lower)projectorstodistribute

signal to two outputs of the two projectors.• Notesforstacking- Askyourservicepersonforsettingupandadjustingprojectors.- Setuptheprojectorsinaplaceorstructureinawaywithsufficientstrengthtosupportthecombinedweightofthetwoprojec-tors.Thesingleprojectorwithalensweighsuptoapproximately32kg/70lbs.

- Topreventtheprojectorsfromfalling,fastentheminawaytowithstandearthquakes.- Doublestackingwillcauseroomtemperaturetoincrease.Ventilatetheroomwell.- Donotattempttostackprojectorsontheceiling.Gravitystackingcannotbedoneontheceiling.- Warmuptheprojectorsforonehourbeforethedesiredprojectionisobtained.- Makesurethatthepositionoftheupperprojectordoesnotexceeditsspecifications.Whensettingupthetwoprojectors,

adjustable height range for the tilt foot on the upper projector is added to the total adjustable range.- Setuptheprojectorssothattheprojectedimageshowsaslittlegeometricdistortionsaspossible.Thelensisdifferentingeometricdistortionbetweenwide(+)andtele(−)forzoom.

- Adjustthehorizontallensshifttothelenscenter. s

Page 175: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

158

6. Installation and Connections

AttachingStackingHoldersAttachthreestackingholderstothreelocationsonthetopofthelowerprojector.

Preparation:ToolsrequiredarePhillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)andfourstackingholderspackagedwiththeprojector.Loosenthetiltfoot(fourlocations)oftheprojector.

1.Removerubbercapsandscrewsatfourlocations.

(1)Useyourtweezersornailtopinchandpulluptherubbercap.

(2)Removethescrewfromasquarehole.(1) (2)

2.Attachthethreestackingholdersatfourlocations.

(1)Placeastackingholderinasquarehole.

(2)UsethescrewremovedatStep1tofixthestackingholderinthesquarehole.

(3)PuttherubbercapremovedatStep1backintothesquarehole.

• Snapthetabsonbothoftherubbercapintotheslitsonbothsidesinthesquarehole.(1) (2) (3)

Page 176: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

159

6. Installation and Connections

3.Putanotherprojectoronthefirstprojector.

Puteachtiltfootoftheupperprojectoronthestackingholders(fourlocations).

• Eachtiltfoothasarubber.Placeeachtiltfootrubberonstackingholders(fourlocations).

Footrubber

TIP:• Toremovethestackingholders,performtheabovestepsinreverseorder.

Page 177: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

160

7. Maintenance❶ Cleaning the Lens• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.

• Useablowerorlenspapertocleanthelens,andbecarefulnottoscratchormarthelens.

WARNING• Pleasedonotuseaspraycontainingflammablegastoremovedustattachedtothelens,etc.Doingsomay

resultinfires.

• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.

❷ Cleaning the CabinetTurnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.

Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.

• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.

• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuumcleaner into the slits of the cabinet.

Vacuumthedustofftheventilationslits.

• Poorventilationcausedbydustaccumulationinventilationopenings(alsoatthebottomoftheprojector)canresultinoverheatingandmalfunction.Theseareasshouldbecleanedregularly.

• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourfingersoranyhardobjects

• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.

NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproductin prolonged contact with it. Otherwise the surface finish will be deteriorated or the coating may be stripped off.

Page 178: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

161

8. Appendix

❶ Throw distance and screen sizeThisprojectorcanbeusedwith8kindsofoptionallenses(soldseparately).Refertotheinformationonthispageandusealenssuitedfortheinstallationenvironment(screensizeandthrowdistance).Forinstructionsonmountingthelens,seepage143.

Lens types and throw distance

Applicable lens unit: NP16FL/NP17ZL/NP18ZL/NP19ZL/NP20ZL/NP21ZL/NP31ZL

Screensize Lens unit model nameinch NP16FL NP17ZL NP18ZL NP19ZL NP20ZL NP21ZL NP31ZL40 0.6 - 0.8 50 0.8 1.3- 1.9 1.8 - 2.4 2.4- 4.0 3.8- 5.8 5.6 - 8.9 0.8 - 1.0 60 1.0 1.6 - 2.3 2.2- 2.9 2.8- 4.8 4.6 - 7.0 6.8 - 10.7 1.0 - 1.280 1.3 2.2- 3.1 3.0- 3.9 3.8- 6.4 6.2- 9.3 9.1 - 14.4 1.3- 1.6

100 1.7 2.7- 3.9 3.7- 4.9 4.8 - 8.0 7.7- 11.7 11.5 - 18.1 1.6 - 2.0120 2.0 3.3- 4.7 4.5 - 5.9 5.8 - 9.6 9.3- 14.1 13.8- 21.7 2.0- 2.5150 2.5 4.1 - 5.8 5.6 - 7.4 7.2- 12.0 11.7- 17.6 17.4- 27.3 2.5- 3.1200 3.4 5.5 - 7.8 7.5- 9.9 9.7- 16.1 15.6 - 23.5 23.3- 36.4 3.3- 4.1 240 4.1 6.6 - 9.4 9.1 - 11.9 11.6 - 19.3 18.8 - 28.3 28.0- 43.8 4.0 - 5.0 300 5.1 8.2- 11.7 11.3- 14.9 14.5 - 24.1 23.5- 35.4 35.0- 54.8 5.0 - 6.2350 5.8 - 7.3400 6.6 - 8.3450 7.5- 9.4 500 8.3- 10.4

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP16FLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.8:0.8m(min.)to5.1m(max.)NP17ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.3toH×1.8:1.3m(min.)to11.7m(max.)NP18ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.7toH×2.3:1.8m(min.)to14.9m(max.)NP19ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×2.2toH×3.7:2.4m(min.)to24.1m(max.)NP20ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×3.6toH×5.4:3.8m(min.)to35.4m(max.)NP21ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×5.3toH×8.3:5.6m(min.)to54.8m(max.)NP31ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.8toH×0.9:0.6m(min.)to10.4m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenusingtheNP18ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→ page 163),H(screenwidth)=127.2"/323.1cm.Thethrowdistanceis323.1cm×1.7to323.1cm×2.3=549.3cmto743.13cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

Page 179: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

162

8. Appendix

Projection range for the different lenses

50-300"40-500"

50-300"

50-300" 50-300" 50-300"

0.8–5.1 mNP16FL :

NP17ZL: 1.3–11.7 m

NP31ZL: 0.6–10.4 m

NP18ZL: 1.8–14.9 m

NP19ZL: 2.4–24.1 m

NP20ZL: 3.8–35.4 m

NP21ZL: 5.6–54.8 m

50-300"

Applicablelensunit:NP39ML

Screensize(inch)

ThrowdistanceL1(m)

L2(m) H1(m) H2(m)

100 0.82 -0.024 2.05 0.70120 0.97 0.13 2.43 0.81150 1.20 0.35 3.00 0.98200 1.57 0.73 3.95 1.26250 1.95 1.11 4.90 1.54300 2.33 1.49 5.85 1.81350 2.71 1.87 6.81 2.09

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP39MLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.38:0.8m(min.)to2.7m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.* Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.

L1

H1

H2

L2

Screen face

Screen center

Projector rear face

Center of the lens unit projection window

Projector bottom face(In the condition the tilt foot is not

lengthen)

[Throw distance]

Screen bottom end

Screen top end

Page 180: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

163

8. Appendix

Tables of screen sizes and dimensions

Screenheight

Screenwidth

16:10screensize (diagonal)

Size(inches) Screenwidth Screenheight

(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

40 33.9 86.2 21.2 53.860 50.9 129.2 31.8 80.880 67.8 172.3 42.4 107.7

100 84.8 215.4 53.0 134.6120 101.8 258.5 63.6 161.5150 127.2 323.1 79.5 201.9200 169.6 430.8 106.0 269.2240 203.5 516.9 127.2 323.1300 254.4 646.2 159.0 403.9400 339.2 861.6 212.0 538.5500 424.0 1077.0 265.0 673.1

Page 181: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

164

8. Appendix

Lens shifting rangeThisprojectorisequippedwithalensshiftfunctionforadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimagebyusingtheLENSSHIFTbuttons(→page23).Thelenscanbeshiftedwithintherangeshownbelow.

NOTE: • Pleasedonotusethelensshiftfunctionwhenprojectingportraitimages.Pleaseuseitwiththelensinthecenterwhenoneamongthelensunits,NP16FL,NP17ZL,NP18ZL,NP19ZL,NP20ZL,NP21ZLorNP31ZLisfixedon.ForusingthelensunitNP39ML,select[TYPE]for[LENSPOSITION]in[INSTALLATION(2)]in[SETUP]ontheonsceenmenuformovingthelensattheappropriateposition.

Legend:V“Vertical”referstothescreenheightandH“Horizontal”referstothescreenwidth.Thelensshiftrangeisexpressedasaratioofheightandwidth,respectively.

100%V

50%V

30%V

100%H

20%H

10%H

10%H

20%H

Heightofprojectedimage

Widthofprojectedimage

* Thelensshiftrangeisthesameforceilinginstallation.

(Example)Whenusingtoprojectona150"screenAccordingtothe“Tableofscreensizesanddimensions”(→page163),H=127.2"/323.1cm,V=79.5"/201.9cm.Adjustment range in the vertical direction: the projected image canbemovedupwards0.5× 79.5"/201.9 cm≈ 39.8"/101cm,downwardsapproximately39.8"/101cm(whenthelensisatthecenterposition).Adjustmentrangeinthehorizontaldirection:theprojectedimagecanbemovedtotheleft0.15×127.2"/323.1cm≈19.1"/48cm,totherightapproximately19.1"/48cm.* Figuresdifferbyseveral%becausethecalculationisapproximate.

Page 182: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

165

8. Appendix

❷ Mounting the Optional Board (sold separately)CAUTIONBeforemountingorremovingtheoptionalboard,besuretoturnofftheprojector,waitforthefanstostopandturnoff the main power switch.

Toolneeded:Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)

1. Turnoffthemainpowerswitchoftheprojector.

2. Loosen the twoscrewson theSLOTcoverof theterminals.

RemovethetwoscrewsandtheSLOTcover.

NOTE: • Keepthetwoscrewsandtheslotcover.

3. Insert the optional board into the slot.

Makesurethattheboardisinsertedintotheslotinthecorrectorientation.

Incorrect orientationmay causemiscommunicationbetweentheoptionalboardandprojector.

Page 183: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

166

8. Appendix

4. Tightenthetwoscrewsonbothsidesoftheslot.

• Besuretotightenthescrews.

Thiswillcompleteinstallationoftheoptionalboard.

Toselecttheoptionalboardsource,selectSLOTastheinput.

NOTE:• Mountingtheoptionalboardmaycausethefanstoruninthestandbymodeforthepurposeofcoolingdependingontheoptionalboard.Thefanspeedmayalsoincreaseinordertocooltheprojectorproperly.Bothoftheseinstancesareconsiderednormaland not a malfunction of the projector.

Page 184: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

167

8. Appendix

❸ Compatible Input Signal ListAnalog Computer Signal

Signal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMacSVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMacXGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMacXGA+ 1152 × 864 4 : 3 60/70/75/85

WXGA

1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601360 × 768 *1 16 : 9 601366 × 768 *1 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60/75/85SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60/75/85SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60/75WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *2 4 : 3 60/65/70/75WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *2 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *2 16 : 9 60MAC13" 640 × 480 4 : 3 67MAC16" 832 × 624 4 : 3 75MAC19" 1024 × 768 4 : 3 75MAC21" 1152 × 870 *3 4 : 3 75MAC23" 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 65

ComponentSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

CompositeVideo/S-VideoSignal AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

NTSC 4 : 3 60PAL 4 : 3 50PAL60 4 : 3 60SECAM 4 : 3 50

Page 185: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

168

8. Appendix

HDMISignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60

WXGA1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *1 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *2 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *2 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *2 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

4K 3840 × 2160 16 : 9 23.98/24/25/29.97/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

HDMI3DSignalResolution(dots) RefreshRate(Hz) AspectRatio 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p23.98/24

16 : 9

FramePackingTopandBottom

50 SideBySide(Half)59.94/60 SideBySide(Half)

1920 × 1080i 50 SideBySide(Half)59.94/60 SideBySide(Half)

1280 × 720p

50FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopandBottom

59.94/60FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopandBottom

Page 186: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

169

8. Appendix

DisplayPortSignal Resolution(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate(Hz)

VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 16 : 9 60

WXGA1280 × 768 15 : 9 601280 × 800 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *1 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *2 4 : 3 60FullHD 1920 × 1080 *2 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *2 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)2K 2048 × 1080 17 : 9 60WQHD iMac27"

2560 × 1440 16 : 9 60

WQXGA 2560 × 1600 16 : 10 60(ReducedBlanking)

4K 3840 × 2160 16 : 9 23.98/24/25/29.97/304096 × 2160 17 : 9 24

HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV(480i/p) 720/1440 × 480 4:3/16:9 60SDTV(576i/p) 720/1440 × 576 4:3/16:9 50

DisplayPort 3DSignalResolution(dots) RefreshRate(Hz) AspectRatio 3DFormat

1920 × 1080p

23.98/24

16 : 9

SideBySide(Half)TopandBottom

25 SideBySide(Half)TopandBottom

50 SideBySide(Half)TopandBottom

59.94/60 SideBySide(Half)TopandBottom

1280 × 720p

50 SideBySide(Half)TopandBottom

59.94/60FramePackingSideBySide(Half)TopandBottom

*1 Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[16:9]for[ASPECTRATIO].*2 Nativeresolution*3 Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[4:3]for[ASPECTRATIO].

• Signalsexceedingtheprojector’sresolutionarehandledwithAdvancedAccuBlend.• WithAdvancedAccuBlend,thesizeofcharactersandruledlinesmaybeunevenandcolorsmaybeblurred.• Uponshipment,theprojectorissetforsignalswithstandarddisplayresolutionsandfrequencies,butadjustmentsmayberequired

dependingonthetypeofcomputer.

Page 187: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

170

8. Appendix

❹ SpecificationsModel name PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BKMethod SingleDLP® chipSpecificationsofmainparts

DMDpanel Size 0.67"(aspectratio:16:10)Pixels(*1) 2,304,000(1920dots×1200lines)

Projection lenses Pleaserefertothespecificationsofoptionlens(→page172)Lightsource LaserDiodeOpticaldevice Opticalisolationbydichroicmirror,combiningbydichroicprism

Lightoutput(*2) (*3) 10000 lmContrastratio(*2)(allwhite/allblack) 10,000:1withdynamiccontrastScreensize(throwdistance) Pleaserefertothespecificationsofoptionlens(→page172)Colorreproducibility 10-bitcolorprocessing(approx.1.07billioncolors)Scanningfrequency Horizontal Analog:15kHz,24to100kHz(24kHzorgreaterforRGBinputs),conformingto

VESAstandardsDigital:15kHz,24to153kHz,conformingtoVESAstandards

Vertical Analog:48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandardsDigital:24,25,30,48Hz,50to85Hz,100,120HzconformingtoVESAstandards

Main adjustment functions Powerzoom,powerfocus,powerlensshift,inputsignalswitching(HDMI/DisplayPort/BNC/BNC(CV)/BNC(Y/C)/COMPUTER/HDBaseT/SLOT),autoimageadjustment,pic-turemaginification,muting(video),poweron/standby,on-screendisplay/selection,etc.

Max.displayresolution(horizontal×vertical)

Analog:1920×1200(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)Digital:4096×2160(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)

InputsignalsR,G,B,H,V RGB:0.7Vp-p/75Ω

Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withNegativePolaritySync)Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩH/VSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLCompositeSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLSynconG:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Compositevideo 1.0Vp-p/75ΩS-Video Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω

C:286Vp-p/75ΩComponent Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩDTV:480i,480p,720p,1080i,1080p(60Hz)

576i,576p,720p,1080i,1080p(50Hz)DVD:Progressivesignal(50/60Hz)

Input/outputterminalsComputer/Com-ponent

Video input MiniD-Sub15-pin×1,BNCterminal×5

HDMI Video input HDMI®TerminaltypeA×1DeepColor(colordepth):8-/10-/12-bitcompatibleColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleLipSynccompatible,HDCPcompatible(*4),Supports4Kand3D

Video output RepeaterAudioinput HDMI:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bits

HDBaseT Video input DeepColor(colordepth):Support8/10/12bitsColorimetry:SupportRGB,YCbCr444andYCbCr422SupportLipSync,HDCP(*4),4K,3D

Audioinput Samplingfrequency:32/44.1/48kHzSamplingbit:16/20/24bit

DisplayPort Video input DisplayPort×1Datarate:2.7Gbps/1.62GbpsNo.lanes:1lane/2lanes/4lanesColordepth:6-bit,8-bit,10-bitColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleHDCPcompatible(*4)

Audioinput DisplayPort:Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz,Samplingbits–16/20/24bitsBNC(CV) Video input BNC×1BNC(Y/C) Video input BNC×2PCcontrolterminal D-Sub9-pin×1USBport USBtypeA×1,USBtypeB×1(Forserviceonly)Ethernet/HDBaseTport RJ-45×1,SupportsBASE-TX

Page 188: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

171

8. Appendix

Model name PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BKRemoteterminal Stereominijack×13DSYNCoutputterminal 5V/10mA,synchronizedsignaloutputfor3Duse

Usageenvironment(*5) Operatingtemperature:41to104°F(5to40°C)Operatinghumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Storagetemperature:14to140°F(-10to60°C)Storagehumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Operatingaltitude:0to3000m/10,000feet

Power supply 110-240VAC,50/60HzPower con-sumption

LIGHTMODE

NORMAL 1220W(110-130V)/1165W(200-240V)ECO1 980W(110-130V)/930W(200-240V)ECO2 625W(110-130V)/605W(200-240V)

STAND-BYMODE

NORMAL 0.20W(110-130V)/0.30W(200-240V)NETWORKSTANDBY

4.3W(110-130V)/4.5W(200-240V)

Ratedinputcurrent 11.6A-5.2AExternaldimensions 19.7"(width)×8.3"(height)×22.7"(depth)/500(width)×211(height)×577(depth)

mm(notincludingprotrudingparts)19.7"(width)×8.5"(height)×23.0"(depth)/500(width)×216(height)×583(depth)mm(includingprotrudingparts)

Weight 63.9lbs/29.0kg(notincludinglens)

*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.*2 This isthelightoutputvaluethatresultsfromsettingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[NORMAL]andsettingthe[PRESET]to[HIGH-

BRIGHT]whileusingtheNP18ZLlens(soldseparately). Thelightoutputvalueislowerwhensettingthe[LIGHTMODE]to[ECO1]or[ECO2].([ECO1]:about80%,[ECO2]:about50%).

Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2012*4 HDMI®(DeepColor,LipSync)withHDCP WhatisHDCP/HDCPtechnology? HDCP isanacronymforHigh-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection.HighbandwidthDigitalContentProtection(HDCP) isa

systemforpreventingillegalcopyingofvideodatasentoveraHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterface(HDMI). IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioningproperly.With

theimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedisplayedduetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).

Video:DeepColor;8/10/12-bit,LipSync Audio:LPCM;upto2ch,samplerate32/44.1/48KHz,samplebit;16/20/24-bit*5 Dependingonthealtitudeandtemperature,theprojectorgoesinto“ForcedECOMODE”.• Thesespecificationsandtheproduct’sdesignaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

Foradditionalinformationvisit:US:http://www.necdisplay.com/Europe:http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/Global:http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.htmlForinformationonouroptionalaccessories,visitourwebsiteorseeourbrochure.

Page 189: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

172

8. Appendix

Optionlens(soldseparately)

NP16FL Power focusthrowratio0.76:1,F1.85,f=11.6mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):0.81–5.08m

NP17ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio1.25–1.79:1,F1.85–2.50,f=18.7–26.5mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):1.33–11.74m

NP18ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio1.73–2.27:1,F1.70–1.90,f=26.0–34.0mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):1.83–14.88m

NP19ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio2.21–3.70:1,F1.86–2.48,f=32.9–54.2mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):2.36–24.13m

NP20ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio3.6–5.4:1,F1.85–2.41,f=52.8–79.1mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):3.80–35.36m

NP21ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio5.3–8.3:1,F1.85–2.48,f=78.5–121.9mmImageSize(Diagonal):50–300inches/1.27–7.62mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):5.60–54.81m

NP31ZL Powerzoomandfocusthrowratio0.75–0.93:1,F1.96–2.30,f=11.3–14.1mmImageSize(Diagonal):40–500inches/1.02–12.7mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):0.62–10.41m

NP39ML Power focusThrowratio0.38:1,F2.0,f=5.64mmImagesize(Diagonal):100–350inches/2.54–8.89mProjectionDistance(Min.–Max.):0.82–2.7m

Page 190: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

173

8. Appendix

Power CordIfthesuppliedpowercordcannotbeusedorinyourareathevoltageconditionisdifferentfromthesuppliedpowercord,usepowercordsthataresuitablefortheelectricalspecifications,typesofpowercordsandregulationsofthecountryofinstallation,asshowninthefollowingtableasshownbelow.Formoreinformation,contactyourdealer.Power Cord Electrical Specifications

Power supply Power cord electrical specsAC100-130V 125V15Aorhigher

250V16AorhigherAC200-240V 250V16Aorhigher

Type of power cord

plug

connector

cord

Plug and cordYourplugmustcomplywithyourcountry’ssafetyrequirementsandyouroutlettype.ConnectorDimensionsoftheconnectorofthepowercordareshownbelow

7+0.5−0

13±0.2

20min2.5+0.5−08±0.2

2.5+0.5−0 R3.5min

6.0+0.5−0

28+0−0.9 20+0−0.7

Unit: mm

Page 191: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

174

8. Appendix

❺ Cabinet Dimensions

Unit:mm(inch)

500 (19.7)

300 (11.8)

150 (5.9)

583

(23)

577

(22.

7)

112.

5 (4

.4)

216

(8.5

)

211

(8.3

)12

4.5

(4.9

)15

0 (5

.9)

150

(5.9

)

Lenscenter

6-M4×L16(Max)forCeilingMount*

* The screws specifications forCeilingMount:

Screwtype:M4 Screw hole dimension on the

projector:M4withthemaximumdepth16mm(0.63")

CAUTION:Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodily injury.Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

Page 192: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

175

8. Appendix

❻ Pin assignments and signal names of main terminalsCOMPUTER IN/ Component Input Terminal (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)

Connection and signal level of each pin

51 42 310

11 12 13 14 156 97 8

Signal LevelVideosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)Syncsignal:TTLlevel

Pin No. RGBSignal(Analog) YCbCrSignal1 Red Cr2 GreenorSynconGreen Y3 Blue Cb4 Ground5 Ground6 RedGround CrGround7 GreenGround YGround8 BlueGround CbGround9 NoConnection10 SyncSignalGround11 NoConnection12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)13 HorizontalSyncorCompositeSync14 VerticalSync15 DataClock

HDMI IN Terminal (Type A)

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal1 TMDSData2+ 11 TMDSClockShield2 TMDSData2Shield 12 TMDSClock−3 TMDSData2− 13 CEC4 TMDSData1+ 14 Disconnection5 TMDSData1Shield 15 SCL6 TMDSData1− 16 SDA7 TMDSData0+ 17 DDC/CECgrounding8 TMDSData0Shield 18 +5Vpowersupply9 TMDSData0− 19 Hotplugdetection10 TMDSClock+

DisplayPort IN Terminal

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 192 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal1 Mainlinklane3− 11 Grounding02 Grounding3 12 Mainlinklane0+3 Mainlinklane3+ 13 Configuration14 Mainlinklane2− 14 Configuration25 Grounding2 15 Supplementarychannel+6 Mainlinklane2+ 16 Grounding47 Mainlinklane1− 17 Supplementarychannel−8 Grounding1 18 Hotplugdetection9 Mainlinklane1+ 19 Return

10 Mainlinklane0− 20 +3.3Vpowersupply

Page 193: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

176

8. Appendix

Ethernet/HDBaseT Port (RJ-45)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pin No. Signal1 TxD+/HDBT0+2 TxD−/HDBT0−3 RxD+/HDBT1+4 Disconnection/HDBT2+5 Disconnection/HDBT2−6 RxD−/HDBT1−7 Disconnection/HDBT3+8 Disconnection/HDBT3−

USB Port (Type A)

1

3

2

4

Pin No. Signal1 VBUS

2 D−3 D+4 Grounding

PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin)

12345

6789

Communications protocol

Pin No. Signal1 Unused2 RxD receptiondata3 TxD transmissiondata4 Unused5 Grounding6 Unused7 RTS transmissionrequest8 CTS transmissionallowed9 Unused

Page 194: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

177

8. Appendix

❼ Changing the Background Logo (Virtual Remote Tool)Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviaaLANconnection.Itisalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventitfromchanging.

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremotecontroloperationonyourPC.

VirtualRemotescreen

RemoteControlWindow Toolbar

ForgettingtheVirtualRemoteTool,pleasevisitourwebsiteanddownloadit:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html

NOTE:• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions: (OnlyviaserialorLANconnection)* Filesize:Within256kilobytes* Imagesize:Withintheresolutionoftheprojector* Fileformat:PNG(Fullcolor)

• Logodata(image)sentusingtheVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedinthecenterwiththesurroundingareainblack.• Toputthedefault“NEClogo”backinthebackgroundlogo,youneedtoregisteritasthebackgroundlogobyusingtheimagefile(\Logo\NEC_logo2015_1920x1200.png)includedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.

Page 195: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

178

8. Appendix

❽ TroubleshootingThissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.

Indicator Messages

POWER Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projector status Procedure

Off Power is off. –

Flashing Blue(shortflashes) Preparingtoturnpoweron Wait a while.

Blue(longflashes) Offtimer(enabled)Programtimer(offtimeenabled)

Orange(shortflashes) Projectorcooling Wait a while.

Orange(longflashes) Programtimer(ontimeenabled) –

Lit Blue Power on –

Red Standbymode(NORMAL) –

Orange Standbymode(NETWORKSTANDBY) –

STATUS Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projector status Procedure

Off Noproblem,orSTANDBYMODE-“NETWORKSTANDBY”

Flashing Red(oncepercycle)

Lensisnotfixedon. Checkfixingconditionsofthelens.

Red(fourtimespercycle)

Fanproblem Thecoolingfanhasstoppedturning.ContactanNECprojector customer support center for repairs.

Green(twicepercycle)

Performingthelenscalibration —

Orange(oncepercycle)

Networkconflict Itisnotpossibletoconnecttheprojector’sbuilt-inLANandwirelessLANsimultaneouslytothesamenetwork.Toconnecttheprojector’sbuilt-inLANandwirelessLANsimultaneously,connectthemtodiffer-entnetworks.IntheSTANDBYstate,thestatusindicatordoesnotflashinOrangeevenifthenetworkconflictionisoc-cured.

Orange(twicepercycle)

Troubleoccurrencewhilethelensshift is functioned as accidentally cut-tingoffthepowersupply.

Carryoutthelenscalibration

Lit Green STANDBYMODEinsleepmode* –

Orange Button has been pressed while pro-jectorisinkeylockmode

Theprojector’skeysarelocked.Thesettingmustbecanceledtooperatetheprojector.(→Page126)

Projector’sIDnumberandremotecontrol’sIDnumberdonotmatch

CheckthecontrolIDs.(→Pages127)

* Sleepmodereferstothestatewherebythefunctionalrestrictionsduetothestandbymodesettingareremoved.

Page 196: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

179

8. Appendix

LIGHT Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projector status Procedure

Off Thelightmoduleisturnedoff.

Flashing Red(sixtimespercycle)

Thelightsourceisnotturned on.

Waitforover1minuteandtrytopowerONtheprojectoragain.Iftheproblemstillpersists,contacttheNECprojectorcustomersupport center.

Lit Green Lightmodulelit –

TEMP.Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projector status Procedure

Off No problem

Flashing Red(cyclesof2)

Temperatureproblem Thetemperatureprotectorhasbeenactivated.Iftheroomtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoacoolplace.Iftheproblemstillpersists,contacttheNECprojectorcustomersup-port center.

Lit Orange Highsurroundingtempera-ture(ForcedECOMode)

Thesurroundingtemperatureishigh.Lowertheroomtempera-ture.

If the temperature protector is activatedIftheprojector’sinternaltemperaturerisesabnormally,thelightmoduleturnsoffandthetemperatureindicatorflashes(repeatedlytwoflashespercycle).Itmayhappenthattheprojector’stemperatureprotectorissimultaneouslyactivatedandtheprojector’spowerturnsoff.Ifthishappens,dothefollowing:

- Unplugthepowercordfromthepoweroutlet.

- Ifusinginaplacewherethesurroundingtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoadifferent,coolplace.

- Ifthereisdustintheventilationslits,clean.(→page160)

- Wait as such about 1 hour for the projector’s internal temperature to lower.

Page 197: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

180

8. Appendix

Common Problems & Solutions(→“POWER/STATUS/LIGHT/TEMP.Indicator”onpage178,179.)

Problem CheckTheseItems

Does not turn onor shut down

• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol is on� (→ pages 14, 17)

• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhasoverheated.Ifthereisinsufficientventilationaroundtheprojectororiftheroom where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location�

• Thelightmodulemayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.• Incaseit’shardtothinkthetroubleisnotcausedontheabovementionedconditions,unplugthepower

cord from the outlet� Then wait 5 minutes before plugging it in again� (→ page 34)

Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER],[AUTOPOWEROFF]or[PROGRAMTIMER]isoff.(→ page 122, 137)

No picture • Checkiftheappropriateinputisselected.(→ page 20) If there is still no picture, press the SOURCE button or one of the source buttons again�

• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 95)• CheckthattheSHUTTER(lensshutter)orAVMUTE(imageoff)buttonsarenotpressed.• Checkthe[POWERONSHUTTER]intheonscreenmenuisnotsetto[CLOSE].• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 138)• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 45)• IftheHDMIINortheDisplayPortINsignalcannotbedisplayed,trythefollowing.

- Reinstall your driver for the video card built in your computer, or use the updated driver� For reinstalling or updating your driver, refer to the user guide accompanied with your computer or video

card, or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer� Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility� We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation�

• SignalsmaynotbesupporteddependingontheHDBaseTtransmissiondevice.IRandRS232Ccannotbeused in certain cases as well�

• Boththecompositevideosignalfromeachinputterminalasthecomputer,BNCIN,andBNC(CV),andtheS-video signal from the BNC (Y/C) Input terminal are not output from HDMI OUT terminal of this projector�

• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon the power to the notebook PC�

In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up�* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-

saver or power management software�• Seealsothepage182�

Picture suddenly becomes dark

• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.

Color tone or hue is unusual

• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 117)

• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 95)

Image isn’t square to the screen

• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 22)• UsetheKeystonecorrectionfunctiontocorrectthetrapezoiddistortion.(→ page 42)

Picture is blurred • Adjustthefocus.(→ page 26)• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 22)• Ensure that thedistancebetween theprojectorandscreen iswithin theadjustment rangeof the lens.

(→ page 161)• Hasthelensbeenshiftedbyanamountexceedingtheguaranteedrange?(→ page 164)• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturned

on� Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�

Image is scrolling vertically, horizontally or both

• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported by the projector� (→ page 167)

• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 97)

Remote control does not work

• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 11)• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.• Standwithin22feet(7m)oftheprojector.(→ page 12)

Indicator is lit or blinking

• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LIGHT/TEMP.Indicator.(→ page 178, 179)

Page 198: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

181

8. Appendix

Problem CheckTheseItems

Cross color in RGB mode

• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 33)• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page

96)

Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.

Page 199: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

182

8. Appendix

If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.

• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.

BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningonthepowertothenotebookPC.

InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbeforebeingpoweredup.

NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,thismeansthereisnosignalbeingoutputfromthecomputer.(→ page 139orgotonextstep)

• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.

DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeonoroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethroughexternaldisplayselections.

• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer

IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.EachnotebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.

• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMac

WhenusingaMacwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)ac-cordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacforthechangestotakeaffect.

ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitchonaMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitchtothe13"fixedmodeandthenrestartyourMac.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemodeandthenrestarttheMacagain.

NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaMacBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub15-pin terminal.

• MirroringonaMacBook

* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”isoffonyourMacBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMaccomputerformirroring.

• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacscreen

Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApplemenuandarrangeicons.

Page 200: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

183

8. Appendix

❾ PC Control Codes and Cable ConnectionPC Control Codes

Function Code Data

POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H

POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H

INPUT SELECT HDMI 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A1H A9H

INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H A6H AEH

INPUT SELECT BNC 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH

INPUT SELECT BNC(CV) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH

INPUT SELECT BNC(Y/C) 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H

INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H

INPUT SELECT HDBaseT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 20H 28H

INPUT SELECT SLOT 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H ABH B3H

PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H

PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H

NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.

Cable ConnectionCommunicationProtocol

Baud rate �����������������������������������������38400 bpsData length ��������������������������������������8 bitsParity �����������������������������������������������No parityStop bit ��������������������������������������������One bitX on/off ��������������������������������������������NoneCommunications procedure �������������Full duplex

NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.

PC Control Terminal (D-SUB 9P)

NOTE1:Pins1,4,6and9arenoused.

NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.

NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.

1 52 43

6 7 98

ToGNDofPC

ToRxDofPC

ToTxDofPC

ToRTSofPC

ToCTSofPC

Page 201: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

184

8. Appendix

❿ Troubleshooting Check ListBeforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsobyreferringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblemmore efficiently.* Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.

Frequency of occurrence □ always □sometimes(Howoften?_____________________) □other(__________________)

Power□ No power (POWER indicator does not light blue)� See also “Status

Indicator (STATUS)”�□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�□ No power even though you press and hold the POWER button�□ The main power switch is in the “ON (I)” position�

□ Shut down during operation�□ Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�□ [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO

POWER OFF] function)�□ [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]

function)�

Video and Audio□ No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the

projector�□ Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC

first, then start the PC�□ Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�

• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysturnstheexternaldisplayon or off.

□ No image (blue or black background, no display)�□ Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�□ Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�□ Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input terminal□ A message appears on the screen�

(_____________________________________________)□ The source connected to the projector is active and available�□ Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or

the contrast�□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the

projector�□ Image is too dark�

□ Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast�

□ Image is distorted�□ Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you

carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�

□ Parts of the image are lost�□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST

button�□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the

projector’s menu�□ Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�

□ Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal�

□ Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector�

□ Some pixels are lost�□ Image is flickering�

□ Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�

□ Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu�

□ Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal�□ Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from

[HIGH] to [AUTO]�□ Image appears blurry or out of focus�

□ Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�

□ Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�

Other□ Remote control does not work�

□ No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control�

□ Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls�

□ Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�

□ Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)□ [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in

the menu�□ Still unchanged even though you press and hold the SOURCE

button for a minimum of 10 seconds�

Page 202: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

185

8. Appendix

In the space below please describe your problem in detail.

Information on application and environment where your projector is used

Projector PC

Blu-rayplayer

Projector

Model number:Serial No�:Date of purchase:Light module operating time (hours):Eco Mode: □ OFF □ ONInformation on input signal:

Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHzVertical synch frequency [ ] HzSynch polarity H □ (+) □ (−) V □ (+) □ (−)Synch type □ Separate □ Composite □ Sync on Green

STATUS Indicator:Steady light □ Orange □ GreenFlashing light [ ] cycles

Remote control model number:

Installation environment

Screen size: inchScreen type: □ White matte □ Beads □ Polarization

□ Wide angle □ High contrastThrow distance: feet/inch/mOrientation: □ Ceiling mount □ DesktopPower outlet connection:□ Connected directly to wall outlet□ Connected to power cord extender or other (the

numberofconnectedequipment______________)□ Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number

ofconnectedequipment______________)

Computer

Manufacturer:

Model number:

Notebook PC □ / Desktop □

Native resolution:

Refresh rate:

Video adapter:

Other:

Videoequipment

VCR, Blu-ray player, Video camera, Video game or other

Manufacturer:

Model number:Signal cable

NECstandardorothermanufacturer’scable?Model number: Length: inch/m

Distribution amplifierModel number:

SwitcherModel number:

AdapterModel number:

Page 203: Projector PX1004UL-WH/PX1004UL-BK · 2017. 5. 2. · Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn

©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2016 7N952521